Fix File

• /home/sportsfe.../httpdocs/wp-inclu.../js/dist

• File: block-editor.js

• Content:

// If a block variation match is found change the name to be the same with the
          // one that is used for block variations in the Inserter (`getItemFromVariation`).
          const match = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.select)(external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.store).getActiveBlockVariation(blockName, attributes);
          if (match?.name) {
            id += '/' + match.name;
          }
          if (blockName === 'core/block') {
            id += '/' + attributes.ref;
          }
          return {
            ...prevUsage,
            [id]: {
              time: action.time,
              count: prevUsage[id] ? prevUsage[id].count + 1 : 1
            }
          };
        }, state.insertUsage);
        return {
          ...state,
          insertUsage: nextInsertUsage
        };
      }
  }
  return state;
}

/**
 * Reducer returning an object where each key is a block client ID, its value
 * representing the settings for its nested blocks.
 *
 * @param {Object} state  Current state.
 * @param {Object} action Dispatched action.
 *
 * @return {Object} Updated state.
 */
const blockListSettings = (state = {}, action) => {
  switch (action.type) {
    // Even if the replaced blocks have the same client ID, our logic
    // should correct the state.
    case 'REPLACE_BLOCKS':
    case 'REMOVE_BLOCKS':
      {
        return Object.fromEntries(Object.entries(state).filter(([id]) => !action.clientIds.includes(id)));
      }
    case 'UPDATE_BLOCK_LIST_SETTINGS':
      {
        const updates = typeof action.clientId === 'string' ? {
          [action.clientId]: action.settings
        } : action.clientId;

// Remove settings that are the same as the current state.
        for (const clientId in updates) {
          if (!updates[clientId]) {
            if (!state[clientId]) {
              delete updates[clientId];
            }
          } else if (es6_default()(state[clientId], updates[clientId])) {
            delete updates[clientId];
          }
        }
        if (Object.keys(updates).length === 0) {
          return state;
        }
        const merged = {
          ...state,
          ...updates
        };
        for (const clientId in updates) {
          if (!updates[clientId]) {
            delete merged[clientId];
          }
        }
        return merged;
      }
  }
  return state;
};

/**
 * Reducer returning which mode is enabled.
 *
 * @param {string} state  Current state.
 * @param {Object} action Dispatched action.
 *
 * @return {string} Updated state.
 */
function editorMode(state = 'edit', action) {
  // Let inserting block in navigation mode always trigger Edit mode.
  if (action.type === 'INSERT_BLOCKS' && state === 'navigation') {
    return 'edit';
  }
  if (action.type === 'SET_EDITOR_MODE') {
    return action.mode;
  }
  return state;
}

/**
 * Reducer returning whether the block moving mode is enabled or not.
 *
 * @param {string|null} state  Current state.
 * @param {Object}      action Dispatched action.
 *
 * @return {string|null} Updated state.
 */
function hasBlockMovingClientId(state = null, action) {
  if (action.type === 'SET_BLOCK_MOVING_MODE') {
    return action.hasBlockMovingClientId;
  }
  if (action.type === 'SET_EDITOR_MODE') {
    return null;
  }
  return state;
}

/**
 * Reducer return an updated state representing the most recent block attribute
 * update. The state is structured as an object where the keys represent the
 * client IDs of blocks, the values a subset of attributes from the most recent
 * block update. The state is always reset to null if the last action is
 * anything other than an attributes update.
 *
 * @param {Object<string,Object>} state  Current state.
 * @param {Object}                action Action object.
 *
 * @return {[string,Object]} Updated state.
 */
function lastBlockAttributesChange(state = null, action) {
  switch (action.type) {
    case 'UPDATE_BLOCK':
      if (!action.updates.attributes) {
        break;
      }
      return {
        [action.clientId]: action.updates.attributes
      };
    case 'UPDATE_BLOCK_ATTRIBUTES':
      return action.clientIds.reduce((accumulator, id) => ({
        ...accumulator,
        [id]: action.uniqueByBlock ? action.attributes[id] : action.attributes
      }), {});
  }
  return state;
}

/**
 * Reducer returning current highlighted block.
 *
 * @param {boolean} state  Current highlighted block.
 * @param {Object}  action Dispatched action.
 *
 * @return {string} Updated state.
 */
function highlightedBlock(state, action) {
  switch (action.type) {
    case 'TOGGLE_BLOCK_HIGHLIGHT':
      const {
        clientId,
        isHighlighted
      } = action;
      if (isHighlighted) {
        return clientId;
      } else if (state === clientId) {
        return null;
      }
      return state;
    case 'SELECT_BLOCK':
      if (action.clientId !== state) {
        return null;
      }
  }
  return state;
}

/**
 * Reducer returning current expanded block in the list view.
 *
 * @param {string|null} state  Current expanded block.
 * @param {Object}      action Dispatched action.
 *
 * @return {string|null} Updated state.
 */
function expandedBlock(state = null, action) {
  switch (action.type) {
    case 'SET_BLOCK_EXPANDED_IN_LIST_VIEW':
      return action.clientId;
    case 'SELECT_BLOCK':
      if (action.clientId !== state) {
        return null;
      }
  }
  return state;
}

/**
 * Reducer returning the block insertion event list state.
 *
 * @param {Object} state  Current state.
 * @param {Object} action Dispatched action.
 *
 * @return {Object} Updated state.
 */
function lastBlockInserted(state = {}, action) {
  switch (action.type) {
    case 'INSERT_BLOCKS':
    case 'REPLACE_BLOCKS':
      if (!action.blocks.length) {
        return state;
      }
      const clientIds = action.blocks.map(block => {
        return block.clientId;
      });
      const source = action.meta?.source;
      return {
        clientIds,
        source
      };
    case 'RESET_BLOCKS':
      return {};
  }
  return state;
}

/**
 * Reducer returning the block that is eding temporarily edited as blocks.
 *
 * @param {Object} state  Current state.
 * @param {Object} action Dispatched action.
 *
 * @return {Object} Updated state.
 */
function temporarilyEditingAsBlocks(state = '', action) {
  if (action.type === 'SET_TEMPORARILY_EDITING_AS_BLOCKS') {
    return action.temporarilyEditingAsBlocks;
  }
  return state;
}

/**
 * Reducer returning the focus mode that should be used when temporarily edit as blocks finishes.
 *
 * @param {Object} state  Current state.
 * @param {Object} action Dispatched action.
 *
 * @return {Object} Updated state.
 */
function temporarilyEditingFocusModeRevert(state = '', action) {
  if (action.type === 'SET_TEMPORARILY_EDITING_AS_BLOCKS') {
    return action.focusModeToRevert;
  }
  return state;
}

/**
 * Reducer returning a map of block client IDs to block editing modes.
 *
 * @param {Map}    state  Current state.
 * @param {Object} action Dispatched action.
 *
 * @return {Map} Updated state.
 */
function blockEditingModes(state = new Map(), action) {
  switch (action.type) {
    case 'SET_BLOCK_EDITING_MODE':
      return new Map(state).set(action.clientId, action.mode);
    case 'UNSET_BLOCK_EDITING_MODE':
      {
        const newState = new Map(state);
        newState.delete(action.clientId);
        return newState;
      }
    case 'RESET_BLOCKS':
      {
        return state.has('') ? new Map().set('', state.get('')) : state;
      }
  }
  return state;
}

/**
 * Reducer returning the clientId of the block settings menu that is currently open.
 *
 * @param {string|null} state  Current state.
 * @param {Object}      action Dispatched action.
 *
 * @return {string|null} Updated state.
 */
function openedBlockSettingsMenu(state = null, action) {
  if ('SET_OPENED_BLOCK_SETTINGS_MENU' === action.type) {
    var _action$clientId;
    return (_action$clientId = action?.clientId) !== null && _action$clientId !== void 0 ? _action$clientId : null;
  }
  return state;
}

/**
 * Reducer returning a map of style IDs to style overrides.
 *
 * @param {Map}    state  Current state.
 * @param {Object} action Dispatched action.
 *
 * @return {Map} Updated state.
 */
function styleOverrides(state = new Map(), action) {
  switch (action.type) {
    case 'SET_STYLE_OVERRIDE':
      return new Map(state).set(action.id, action.style);
    case 'DELETE_STYLE_OVERRIDE':
      {
        const newState = new Map(state);
        newState.delete(action.id);
        return newState;
      }
  }
  return state;
}

/**
 * Reducer returning a map of the registered inserter media categories.
 *
 * @param {Array}  state  Current state.
 * @param {Object} action Dispatched action.
 *
 * @return {Array} Updated state.
 */
function registeredInserterMediaCategories(state = [], action) {
  switch (action.type) {
    case 'REGISTER_INSERTER_MEDIA_CATEGORY':
      return [...state, action.category];
  }
  return state;
}

/**
 * Reducer setting last focused element
 *
 * @param {boolean} state  Current state.
 * @param {Object}  action Dispatched action.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Updated state.
 */
function lastFocus(state = false, action) {
  switch (action.type) {
    case 'LAST_FOCUS':
      return action.lastFocus;
  }
  return state;
}
const combinedReducers = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.combineReducers)({
  blocks,
  isDragging,
  isTyping,
  isBlockInterfaceHidden,
  draggedBlocks,
  selection,
  isMultiSelecting,
  isSelectionEnabled,
  initialPosition,
  blocksMode,
  blockListSettings,
  insertionPoint,
  template,
  settings,
  preferences,
  lastBlockAttributesChange,
  lastFocus,
  editorMode,
  hasBlockMovingClientId,
  expandedBlock,
  highlightedBlock,
  lastBlockInserted,
  temporarilyEditingAsBlocks,
  temporarilyEditingFocusModeRevert,
  blockVisibility,
  blockEditingModes,
  styleOverrides,
  removalPromptData,
  blockRemovalRules,
  openedBlockSettingsMenu,
  registeredInserterMediaCategories
});
function withAutomaticChangeReset(reducer) {
  return (state, action) => {
    const nextState = reducer(state, action);
    if (!state) {
      return nextState;
    }

// Take over the last value without creating a new reference.
    nextState.automaticChangeStatus = state.automaticChangeStatus;
    if (action.type === 'MARK_AUTOMATIC_CHANGE') {
      return {
        ...nextState,
        automaticChangeStatus: 'pending'
      };
    }
    if (action.type === 'MARK_AUTOMATIC_CHANGE_FINAL' && state.automaticChangeStatus === 'pending') {
      return {
        ...nextState,
        automaticChangeStatus: 'final'
      };
    }

// If there's a change that doesn't affect blocks or selection, maintain
    // the current status.
    if (nextState.blocks === state.blocks && nextState.selection === state.selection) {
      return nextState;
    }

// As long as the state is not final, ignore any selection changes.
    if (nextState.automaticChangeStatus !== 'final' && nextState.selection !== state.selection) {
      return nextState;
    }

// Reset the status if blocks change or selection changes (when status is final).
    return {
      ...nextState,
      automaticChangeStatus: undefined
    };
  };
}
/* harmony default export */ const reducer = (withAutomaticChangeReset(combinedReducers));

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: external ["wp","primitives"]
const external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject = window["wp"]["primitives"];
;// CONCATENATED MODULE: external "ReactJSXRuntime"
const external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject = window["ReactJSXRuntime"];
;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/icons/build-module/library/symbol.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const symbol = /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.SVG, {
  xmlns: "http://www.w3.org/2000/svg",
  viewBox: "0 0 24 24",
  children: /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "M21.3 10.8l-5.6-5.6c-.7-.7-1.8-.7-2.5 0l-5.6 5.6c-.7.7-.7 1.8 0 2.5l5.6 5.6c.3.3.8.5 1.2.5s.9-.2 1.2-.5l5.6-5.6c.8-.7.8-1.9.1-2.5zm-1 1.4l-5.6 5.6c-.1.1-.3.1-.4 0l-5.6-5.6c-.1-.1-.1-.3 0-.4l5.6-5.6s.1-.1.2-.1.1 0 .2.1l5.6 5.6c.1.1.1.3 0 .4zm-16.6-.4L10 5.5l-1-1-6.3 6.3c-.7.7-.7 1.8 0 2.5L9 19.5l1.1-1.1-6.3-6.3c-.2 0-.2-.2-.1-.3z"
  })
});
/* harmony default export */ const library_symbol = (symbol);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: external ["wp","richText"]
const external_wp_richText_namespaceObject = window["wp"]["richText"];
;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/store/private-keys.js
const globalStylesDataKey = Symbol('globalStylesDataKey');
const selectBlockPatternsKey = Symbol('selectBlockPatternsKey');
const reusableBlocksSelectKey = Symbol('reusableBlocksSelect');

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: external ["wp","privateApis"]
const external_wp_privateApis_namespaceObject = window["wp"]["privateApis"];
;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/lock-unlock.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const {
  lock,
  unlock
} = (0,external_wp_privateApis_namespaceObject.__dangerousOptInToUnstableAPIsOnlyForCoreModules)('I acknowledge private features are not for use in themes or plugins and doing so will break in the next version of WordPress.', '@wordpress/block-editor');

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/store/constants.js
const STORE_NAME = 'core/block-editor';

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/store/utils.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/utils/sorting.js
/**
 * Recursive stable sorting comparator function.
 *
 * @param {string|Function} field Field to sort by.
 * @param {Array}           items Items to sort.
 * @param {string}          order Order, 'asc' or 'desc'.
 * @return {Function} Comparison function to be used in a `.sort()`.
 */
const comparator = (field, items, order) => {
  return (a, b) => {
    let cmpA, cmpB;
    if (typeof field === 'function') {
      cmpA = field(a);
      cmpB = field(b);
    } else {
      cmpA = a[field];
      cmpB = b[field];
    }
    if (cmpA > cmpB) {
      return order === 'asc' ? 1 : -1;
    } else if (cmpB > cmpA) {
      return order === 'asc' ? -1 : 1;
    }
    const orderA = items.findIndex(item => item === a);
    const orderB = items.findIndex(item => item === b);

// Stable sort: maintaining original array order
    if (orderA > orderB) {
      return 1;
    } else if (orderB > orderA) {
      return -1;
    }
    return 0;
  };
};

/**
 * Order items by a certain key.
 * Supports decorator functions that allow complex picking of a comparison field.
 * Sorts in ascending order by default, but supports descending as well.
 * Stable sort - maintains original order of equal items.
 *
 * @param {Array}           items Items to order.
 * @param {string|Function} field Field to order by.
 * @param {string}          order Sorting order, `asc` or `desc`.
 * @return {Array} Sorted items.
 */
function orderBy(items, field, order = 'asc') {
  return items.concat().sort(comparator(field, items, order));
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/inserter/block-patterns-tab/utils.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

// If theme source selected, filter out user created patterns and those from
  // the core patterns directory.
  if (sourceFilter === INSERTER_PATTERN_TYPES.theme && (isUserPattern || isDirectoryPattern)) {
    return true;
  }

// If the directory source is selected, filter out user created patterns
  // and those bundled with the theme.
  if (sourceFilter === INSERTER_PATTERN_TYPES.directory && (isUserPattern || !isDirectoryPattern)) {
    return true;
  }

// If user source selected, filter out theme patterns.
  if (sourceFilter === INSERTER_PATTERN_TYPES.user && pattern.type !== INSERTER_PATTERN_TYPES.user) {
    return true;
  }

// Filter by sync status.
  if (syncFilter === INSERTER_SYNC_TYPES.full && pattern.syncStatus !== '') {
    return true;
  }
  if (syncFilter === INSERTER_SYNC_TYPES.unsynced && pattern.syncStatus !== 'unsynced' && isUserPattern) {
    return true;
  }
  return false;
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/utils/object.js
/**
 * Immutably sets a value inside an object. Like `lodash#set`, but returning a
 * new object. Treats nullish initial values as empty objects. Clones any
 * nested objects. Supports arrays, too.
 *
 * @param {Object}              object Object to set a value in.
 * @param {number|string|Array} path   Path in the object to modify.
 * @param {*}                   value  New value to set.
 * @return {Object} Cloned object with the new value set.
 */
function setImmutably(object, path, value) {
  // Normalize path
  path = Array.isArray(path) ? [...path] : [path];

// Shallowly clone the base of the object
  object = Array.isArray(object) ? [...object] : {
    ...object
  };
  const leaf = path.pop();

// Traverse object from root to leaf, shallowly cloning at each level
  let prev = object;
  for (const key of path) {
    const lvl = prev[key];
    prev = prev[key] = Array.isArray(lvl) ? [...lvl] : {
      ...lvl
    };
  }
  prev[leaf] = value;
  return object;
}

/**
 * Helper util to return a value from a certain path of the object.
 * Path is specified as either:
 * - a string of properties, separated by dots, for example: "x.y".
 * - an array of properties, for example `[ 'x', 'y' ]`.
 * You can also specify a default value in case the result is nullish.
 *
 * @param {Object}       object       Input object.
 * @param {string|Array} path         Path to the object property.
 * @param {*}            defaultValue Default value if the value at the specified path is nullish.
 * @return {*} Value of the object property at the specified path.
 */
const getValueFromObjectPath = (object, path, defaultValue) => {
  var _value;
  const arrayPath = Array.isArray(path) ? path : path.split('.');
  let value = object;
  arrayPath.forEach(fieldName => {
    value = value?.[fieldName];
  });
  return (_value = value) !== null && _value !== void 0 ? _value : defaultValue;
};

/**
 * Helper util to filter out objects with duplicate values for a given property.
 *
 * @param {Object[]} array    Array of objects to filter.
 * @param {string}   property Property to filter unique values by.
 *
 * @return {Object[]} Array of objects with unique values for the specified property.
 */
function uniqByProperty(array, property) {
  const seen = new Set();
  return array.filter(item => {
    const value = item[property];
    return seen.has(value) ? false : seen.add(value);
  });
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/store/get-block-settings.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

/**
 * Remove `custom` prefixes for flags that did not land in 5.8.
 *
 * This provides continued support for `custom` prefixed properties. It will
 * be removed once third party devs have had sufficient time to update themes,
 * plugins, etc.
 *
 * @see https://github.com/WordPress/gutenberg/pull/34485
 *
 * @param {string} path Path to desired value in settings.
 * @return {string}     The value for defined setting.
 */
const removeCustomPrefixes = path => {
  return prefixedFlags[path] || path;
};
function getBlockSettings(state, clientId, ...paths) {
  const blockName = getBlockName(state, clientId);
  const candidates = [];
  if (clientId) {
    let id = clientId;
    do {
      const name = getBlockName(state, id);
      if ((0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.hasBlockSupport)(name, '__experimentalSettings', false)) {
        candidates.push(id);
      }
    } while (id = state.blocks.parents.get(id));
  }
  return paths.map(path => {
    if (blockedPaths.includes(path)) {
      // eslint-disable-next-line no-console
      console.warn('Top level useSetting paths are disabled. Please use a subpath to query the information needed.');
      return undefined;
    }

// 0. Allow third parties to filter the block's settings at runtime.
    let result = (0,external_wp_hooks_namespaceObject.applyFilters)('blockEditor.useSetting.before', undefined, path, clientId, blockName);
    if (undefined !== result) {
      return result;
    }
    const normalizedPath = removeCustomPrefixes(path);

// 1. Take settings from the block instance or its ancestors.
    // Start from the current block and work our way up the ancestors.
    for (const candidateClientId of candidates) {
      var _getValueFromObjectPa;
      const candidateAtts = getBlockAttributes(state, candidateClientId);
      result = (_getValueFromObjectPa = getValueFromObjectPath(candidateAtts.settings?.blocks?.[blockName], normalizedPath)) !== null && _getValueFromObjectPa !== void 0 ? _getValueFromObjectPa : getValueFromObjectPath(candidateAtts.settings, normalizedPath);
      if (result !== undefined) {
        // Stop the search for more distant ancestors and move on.
        break;
      }
    }

// 2. Fall back to the settings from the block editor store (__experimentalFeatures).
    const settings = getSettings(state);
    if (result === undefined && blockName) {
      result = getValueFromObjectPath(settings.__experimentalFeatures?.blocks?.[blockName], normalizedPath);
    }
    if (result === undefined) {
      result = getValueFromObjectPath(settings.__experimentalFeatures, normalizedPath);
    }

// Return if the setting was found in either the block instance or the store.
    if (result !== undefined) {
      if (external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.__EXPERIMENTAL_PATHS_WITH_OVERRIDE[normalizedPath]) {
        var _ref, _result$custom;
        return (_ref = (_result$custom = result.custom) !== null && _result$custom !== void 0 ? _result$custom : result.theme) !== null && _ref !== void 0 ? _ref : result.default;
      }
      return result;
    }

// 3. Otherwise, use deprecated settings.
    const deprecatedSettingsValue = deprecatedFlags[normalizedPath]?.(settings);
    if (deprecatedSettingsValue !== undefined) {
      return deprecatedSettingsValue;
    }

// 4. Fallback for typography.dropCap:
    // This is only necessary to support typography.dropCap.
    // when __experimentalFeatures are not present (core without plugin).
    // To remove when __experimentalFeatures are ported to core.
    return normalizedPath === 'typography.dropCap' ? true : undefined;
  });
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/store/private-selectors.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

/**
 * Returns true if the block interface is hidden, or false otherwise.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the block toolbar is hidden.
 */
function private_selectors_isBlockInterfaceHidden(state) {
  return state.isBlockInterfaceHidden;
}

/**
 * Gets the client ids of the last inserted blocks.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 * @return {Array|undefined} Client Ids of the last inserted block(s).
 */
function getLastInsertedBlocksClientIds(state) {
  return state?.lastBlockInserted?.clientIds;
}
function getBlockWithoutAttributes(state, clientId) {
  return state.blocks.byClientId.get(clientId);
}

/**
 * Returns true if all of the descendants of a block with the given client ID
 * have an editing mode of 'disabled', or false otherwise.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Global application state.
 * @param {string} clientId The block client ID.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the block descendants are disabled.
 */
const isBlockSubtreeDisabled = (state, clientId) => {
  const isChildSubtreeDisabled = childClientId => {
    return getBlockEditingMode(state, childClientId) === 'disabled' && getBlockOrder(state, childClientId).every(isChildSubtreeDisabled);
  };
  return getBlockOrder(state, clientId).every(isChildSubtreeDisabled);
};
function getEnabledClientIdsTreeUnmemoized(state, rootClientId) {
  const blockOrder = getBlockOrder(state, rootClientId);
  const result = [];
  for (const clientId of blockOrder) {
    const innerBlocks = getEnabledClientIdsTreeUnmemoized(state, clientId);
    if (getBlockEditingMode(state, clientId) !== 'disabled') {
      result.push({
        clientId,
        innerBlocks
      });
    } else {
      result.push(...innerBlocks);
    }
  }
  return result;
}

/**
 * Returns a tree of block objects with only clientID and innerBlocks set.
 * Blocks with a 'disabled' editing mode are not included.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state        Global application state.
 * @param {?string} rootClientId Optional root client ID of block list.
 *
 * @return {Object[]} Tree of block objects with only clientID and innerBlocks set.
 */
const getEnabledClientIdsTree = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)(getEnabledClientIdsTreeUnmemoized, state => [state.blocks.order, state.blockEditingModes, state.settings.templateLock, state.blockListSettings]);

/**
 * Returns a list of a given block's ancestors, from top to bottom. Blocks with
 * a 'disabled' editing mode are excluded.
 *
 * @see getBlockParents
 *
 * @param {Object}  state     Global application state.
 * @param {string}  clientId  The block client ID.
 * @param {boolean} ascending Order results from bottom to top (true) or top
 *                            to bottom (false).
 */
const getEnabledBlockParents = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, clientId, ascending = false) => {
  return getBlockParents(state, clientId, ascending).filter(parent => getBlockEditingMode(state, parent) !== 'disabled');
}, state => [state.blocks.parents, state.blockEditingModes, state.settings.templateLock, state.blockListSettings]);

/**
 * Selector that returns the data needed to display a prompt when certain
 * blocks are removed, or `false` if no such prompt is requested.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {Object|false} Data for removal prompt display, if any.
 */
function getRemovalPromptData(state) {
  return state.removalPromptData;
}

/**
 * Returns true if removal prompt exists, or false otherwise.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether removal prompt exists.
 */
function getBlockRemovalRules(state) {
  return state.blockRemovalRules;
}

/**
 * Returns the client ID of the block settings menu that is currently open.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 * @return {string|null} The client ID of the block menu that is currently open.
 */
function getOpenedBlockSettingsMenu(state) {
  return state.openedBlockSettingsMenu;
}

/**
 * Returns all style overrides, intended to be merged with global editor styles.
 *
 * Overrides are sorted to match the order of the blocks they relate to. This
 * is useful to maintain correct CSS cascade order.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {Array} An array of style ID to style override pairs.
 */
const getStyleOverrides = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)(state => {
  const clientIds = getClientIdsWithDescendants(state);
  const clientIdMap = clientIds.reduce((acc, clientId, index) => {
    acc[clientId] = index;
    return acc;
  }, {});
  return [...state.styleOverrides].sort((overrideA, overrideB) => {
    var _clientIdMap$clientId, _clientIdMap$clientId2;
    // Once the overrides Map is spread to an array, the first element
    // is the key, while the second is the override itself including
    // the clientId to sort by.
    const [, {
      clientId: clientIdA
    }] = overrideA;
    const [, {
      clientId: clientIdB
    }] = overrideB;
    const aIndex = (_clientIdMap$clientId = clientIdMap[clientIdA]) !== null && _clientIdMap$clientId !== void 0 ? _clientIdMap$clientId : -1;
    const bIndex = (_clientIdMap$clientId2 = clientIdMap[clientIdB]) !== null && _clientIdMap$clientId2 !== void 0 ? _clientIdMap$clientId2 : -1;
    return aIndex - bIndex;
  });
}, state => [state.blocks.order, state.styleOverrides]);

/** @typedef {import('./actions').InserterMediaCategory} InserterMediaCategory */
/**
 * Returns the registered inserter media categories through the public API.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {InserterMediaCategory[]} Inserter media categories.
 */
function getRegisteredInserterMediaCategories(state) {
  return state.registeredInserterMediaCategories;
}

/**
 * Returns an array containing the allowed inserter media categories.
 * It merges the registered media categories from extenders with the
 * core ones. It also takes into account the allowed `mime_types`, which
 * can be altered by `upload_mimes` filter and restrict some of them.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {InserterMediaCategory[]} Client IDs of descendants.
 */
const getInserterMediaCategories = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)(state => {
  const {
    settings: {
      inserterMediaCategories,
      allowedMimeTypes,
      enableOpenverseMediaCategory
    },
    registeredInserterMediaCategories
  } = state;
  // The allowed `mime_types` can be altered by `upload_mimes` filter and restrict
  // some of them. In this case we shouldn't add the category to the available media
  // categories list in the inserter.
  if (!inserterMediaCategories && !registeredInserterMediaCategories.length || !allowedMimeTypes) {
    return;
  }
  const coreInserterMediaCategoriesNames = inserterMediaCategories?.map(({
    name
  }) => name) || [];
  const mergedCategories = [...(inserterMediaCategories || []), ...(registeredInserterMediaCategories || []).filter(({
    name
  }) => !coreInserterMediaCategoriesNames.includes(name))];
  return mergedCategories.filter(category => {
    // Check if Openverse category is enabled.
    if (!enableOpenverseMediaCategory && category.name === 'openverse') {
      return false;
    }
    return Object.values(allowedMimeTypes).some(mimeType => mimeType.startsWith(`${category.mediaType}/`));
  });
}, state => [state.settings.inserterMediaCategories, state.settings.allowedMimeTypes, state.settings.enableOpenverseMediaCategory, state.registeredInserterMediaCategories]);

/**
 * Returns whether there is at least one allowed pattern for inner blocks children.
 * This is useful for deferring the parsing of all patterns until needed.
 *
 * @param {Object} state               Editor state.
 * @param {string} [rootClientId=null] Target root client ID.
 *
 * @return {boolean} If there is at least one allowed pattern.
 */
const hasAllowedPatterns = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createRegistrySelector)(select => (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, rootClientId = null) => {
  const {
    getAllPatterns
  } = unlock(select(STORE_NAME));
  const patterns = getAllPatterns();
  const {
    allowedBlockTypes
  } = getSettings(state);
  return patterns.some(pattern => {
    const {
      inserter = true
    } = pattern;
    if (!inserter) {
      return false;
    }
    const {
      blocks
    } = getParsedPattern(pattern);
    return checkAllowListRecursive(blocks, allowedBlockTypes) && blocks.every(({
      name: blockName
    }) => canInsertBlockType(state, blockName, rootClientId));
  });
}, (state, rootClientId) => [...getAllPatternsDependants(select)(state), ...getInsertBlockTypeDependants(state, rootClientId)]));
function mapUserPattern(userPattern, __experimentalUserPatternCategories = []) {
  return {
    name: `core/block/${userPattern.id}`,
    id: userPattern.id,
    type: INSERTER_PATTERN_TYPES.user,
    title: userPattern.title.raw,
    categories: userPattern.wp_pattern_category.map(catId => {
      const category = __experimentalUserPatternCategories.find(({
        id
      }) => id === catId);
      return category ? category.slug : catId;
    }),
    content: userPattern.content.raw,
    syncStatus: userPattern.wp_pattern_sync_status
  };
}
const getPatternBySlug = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createRegistrySelector)(select => (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, patternName) => {
  var _state$settings$__exp, _state$settings$selec;
  // Only fetch reusable blocks if we know we need them. To do: maybe
  // use the entity record API to retrieve the block by slug.
  if (patternName?.startsWith('core/block/')) {
    const _id = parseInt(patternName.slice('core/block/'.length), 10);
    const block = unlock(select(STORE_NAME)).getReusableBlocks().find(({
      id
    }) => id === _id);
    if (!block) {
      return null;
    }
    return mapUserPattern(block, state.settings.__experimentalUserPatternCategories);
  }
  return [
  // This setting is left for back compat.
  ...((_state$settings$__exp = state.settings.__experimentalBlockPatterns) !== null && _state$settings$__exp !== void 0 ? _state$settings$__exp : []), ...((_state$settings$selec = state.settings[selectBlockPatternsKey]?.(select)) !== null && _state$settings$selec !== void 0 ? _state$settings$selec : [])].find(({
    name
  }) => name === patternName);
}, (state, patternName) => patternName?.startsWith('core/block/') ? [unlock(select(STORE_NAME)).getReusableBlocks(), state.settings.__experimentalReusableBlocks] : [state.settings.__experimentalBlockPatterns, state.settings[selectBlockPatternsKey]?.(select)]));
const getAllPatterns = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createRegistrySelector)(select => (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)(state => {
  var _state$settings$__exp2, _state$settings$selec2;
  return [...unlock(select(STORE_NAME)).getReusableBlocks().map(userPattern => mapUserPattern(userPattern, state.settings.__experimentalUserPatternCategories)),
  // This setting is left for back compat.
  ...((_state$settings$__exp2 = state.settings.__experimentalBlockPatterns) !== null && _state$settings$__exp2 !== void 0 ? _state$settings$__exp2 : []), ...((_state$settings$selec2 = state.settings[selectBlockPatternsKey]?.(select)) !== null && _state$settings$selec2 !== void 0 ? _state$settings$selec2 : [])].filter((x, index, arr) => index === arr.findIndex(y => x.name === y.name));
}, getAllPatternsDependants(select)));
const isResolvingPatterns = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createRegistrySelector)(select => (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)(state => {
  const blockPatternsSelect = state.settings[selectBlockPatternsKey];
  const reusableBlocksSelect = state.settings[reusableBlocksSelectKey];
  return (blockPatternsSelect ? blockPatternsSelect(select) === undefined : false) || (reusableBlocksSelect ? reusableBlocksSelect(select) === undefined : false);
}, getAllPatternsDependants(select)));
const EMPTY_ARRAY = [];
const getReusableBlocks = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createRegistrySelector)(select => state => {
  var _state$settings$__exp3;
  const reusableBlocksSelect = state.settings[reusableBlocksSelectKey];
  return reusableBlocksSelect ? reusableBlocksSelect(select) : (_state$settings$__exp3 = state.settings.__experimentalReusableBlocks) !== null && _state$settings$__exp3 !== void 0 ? _state$settings$__exp3 : EMPTY_ARRAY;
});

/**
 * Returns the element of the last element that had focus when focus left the editor canvas.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Block editor state.
 *
 * @return {Object} Element.
 */
function getLastFocus(state) {
  return state.lastFocus;
}

/**
 * Returns true if the user is dragging anything, or false otherwise. It is possible for a
 * user to be dragging data from outside of the editor, so this selector is separate from
 * the `isDraggingBlocks` selector which only returns true if the user is dragging blocks.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether user is dragging.
 */
function private_selectors_isDragging(state) {
  return state.isDragging;
}

/**
 * Retrieves the expanded block from the state.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Block editor state.
 *
 * @return {string|null} The client ID of the expanded block, if set.
 */
function getExpandedBlock(state) {
  return state.expandedBlock;
}

/**
 * Retrieves the client ID of the ancestor block that is content locking the block
 * with the provided client ID.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Global application state.
 * @param {Object} clientId Client Id of the block.
 *
 * @return {?string} Client ID of the ancestor block that is content locking the block.
 */
const getContentLockingParent = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, clientId) => {
  let current = clientId;
  let result;
  while (current = state.blocks.parents.get(current)) {
    if (getBlockName(state, current) === 'core/block' || getTemplateLock(state, current) === 'contentOnly') {
      result = current;
    }
  }
  return result;
}, state => [state.blocks.parents, state.blockListSettings]);

/**
 * Retrieves the client ID of the block that is content locked but is
 * currently being temporarily edited as a non-locked block.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {?string} The client ID of the block being temporarily edited as a non-locked block.
 */
function getTemporarilyEditingAsBlocks(state) {
  return state.temporarilyEditingAsBlocks;
}

/**
 * Returns the focus mode that should be reapplied when the user stops editing
 * a content locked blocks as a block without locking.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {?string} The focus mode that should be re-set when temporarily editing as blocks stops.
 */
function getTemporarilyEditingFocusModeToRevert(state) {
  return state.temporarilyEditingFocusModeRevert;
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/store/selectors.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

/**
 * A block selection object.
 *
 * @typedef {Object} WPBlockSelection
 *
 * @property {string} clientId     A block client ID.
 * @property {string} attributeKey A block attribute key.
 * @property {number} offset       An attribute value offset, based on the rich
 *                                 text value. See `wp.richText.create`.
 */

// Module constants.
const MILLISECONDS_PER_HOUR = 3600 * 1000;
const MILLISECONDS_PER_DAY = 24 * 3600 * 1000;
const MILLISECONDS_PER_WEEK = 7 * 24 * 3600 * 1000;

/**
 * Shared reference to an empty array for cases where it is important to avoid
 * returning a new array reference on every invocation, as in a connected or
 * other pure component which performs `shouldComponentUpdate` check on props.
 * This should be used as a last resort, since the normalized data should be
 * maintained by the reducer result in state.
 *
 * @type {Array}
 */
const selectors_EMPTY_ARRAY = [];

/**
 * Shared reference to an empty Set for cases where it is important to avoid
 * returning a new Set reference on every invocation, as in a connected or
 * other pure component which performs `shouldComponentUpdate` check on props.
 * This should be used as a last resort, since the normalized data should be
 * maintained by the reducer result in state.
 *
 * @type {Set}
 */
const EMPTY_SET = new Set();
const EMPTY_OBJECT = {};

/**
 * Returns a block's name given its client ID, or null if no block exists with
 * the client ID.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientId Block client ID.
 *
 * @return {string} Block name.
 */
function getBlockName(state, clientId) {
  const block = state.blocks.byClientId.get(clientId);
  const socialLinkName = 'core/social-link';
  if (external_wp_element_namespaceObject.Platform.OS !== 'web' && block?.name === socialLinkName) {
    const attributes = state.blocks.attributes.get(clientId);
    const {
      service
    } = attributes !== null && attributes !== void 0 ? attributes : {};
    return service ? `${socialLinkName}-${service}` : socialLinkName;
  }
  return block ? block.name : null;
}

/**
 * Returns whether a block is valid or not.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientId Block client ID.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Is Valid.
 */
function isBlockValid(state, clientId) {
  const block = state.blocks.byClientId.get(clientId);
  return !!block && block.isValid;
}

/**
 * Returns a block's attributes given its client ID, or null if no block exists with
 * the client ID.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientId Block client ID.
 *
 * @return {Object?} Block attributes.
 */
function getBlockAttributes(state, clientId) {
  const block = state.blocks.byClientId.get(clientId);
  if (!block) {
    return null;
  }
  return state.blocks.attributes.get(clientId);
}

/**
 * Returns a block given its client ID. This is a parsed copy of the block,
 * containing its `blockName`, `clientId`, and current `attributes` state. This
 * is not the block's registration settings, which must be retrieved from the
 * blocks module registration store.
 *
 * getBlock recurses through its inner blocks until all its children blocks have
 * been retrieved. Note that getBlock will not return the child inner blocks of
 * an inner block controller. This is because an inner block controller syncs
 * itself with its own entity, and should therefore not be included with the
 * blocks of a different entity. For example, say you call `getBlocks( TP )` to
 * get the blocks of a template part. If another template part is a child of TP,
 * then the nested template part's child blocks will not be returned. This way,
 * the template block itself is considered part of the parent, but the children
 * are not.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientId Block client ID.
 *
 * @return {Object} Parsed block object.
 */
function getBlock(state, clientId) {
  if (!state.blocks.byClientId.has(clientId)) {
    return null;
  }
  return state.blocks.tree.get(clientId);
}
const __unstableGetBlockWithoutInnerBlocks = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, clientId) => {
  const block = state.blocks.byClientId.get(clientId);
  if (!block) {
    return null;
  }
  return {
    ...block,
    attributes: getBlockAttributes(state, clientId)
  };
}, (state, clientId) => [state.blocks.byClientId.get(clientId), state.blocks.attributes.get(clientId)]);

/**
 * Returns all block objects for the current post being edited as an array in
 * the order they appear in the post. Note that this will exclude child blocks
 * of nested inner block controllers.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state        Editor state.
 * @param {?string} rootClientId Optional root client ID of block list.
 *
 * @return {Object[]} Post blocks.
 */
function getBlocks(state, rootClientId) {
  const treeKey = !rootClientId || !areInnerBlocksControlled(state, rootClientId) ? rootClientId || '' : 'controlled||' + rootClientId;
  return state.blocks.tree.get(treeKey)?.innerBlocks || selectors_EMPTY_ARRAY;
}

/**
 * Returns a stripped down block object containing only its client ID,
 * and its inner blocks' client IDs.
 *
 * @deprecated
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientId Client ID of the block to get.
 *
 * @return {Object} Client IDs of the post blocks.
 */
const __unstableGetClientIdWithClientIdsTree = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, clientId) => {
  external_wp_deprecated_default()("wp.data.select( 'core/block-editor' ).__unstableGetClientIdWithClientIdsTree", {
    since: '6.3',
    version: '6.5'
  });
  return {
    clientId,
    innerBlocks: __unstableGetClientIdsTree(state, clientId)
  };
}, state => [state.blocks.order]);

/**
 * Returns the block tree represented in the block-editor store from the
 * given root, consisting of stripped down block objects containing only
 * their client IDs, and their inner blocks' client IDs.
 *
 * @deprecated
 *
 * @param {Object}  state        Editor state.
 * @param {?string} rootClientId Optional root client ID of block list.
 *
 * @return {Object[]} Client IDs of the post blocks.
 */
const __unstableGetClientIdsTree = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, rootClientId = '') => {
  external_wp_deprecated_default()("wp.data.select( 'core/block-editor' ).__unstableGetClientIdsTree", {
    since: '6.3',
    version: '6.5'
  });
  return getBlockOrder(state, rootClientId).map(clientId => __unstableGetClientIdWithClientIdsTree(state, clientId));
}, state => [state.blocks.order]);

/**
 * Returns an array containing the clientIds of all descendants of the blocks
 * given. Returned ids are ordered first by the order of the ids given, then
 * by the order that they appear in the editor.
 *
 * @param {Object}          state   Global application state.
 * @param {string|string[]} rootIds Client ID(s) for which descendant blocks are to be returned.
 *
 * @return {Array} Client IDs of descendants.
 */
const getClientIdsOfDescendants = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, rootIds) => {
  rootIds = Array.isArray(rootIds) ? [...rootIds] : [rootIds];
  const ids = [];

// Add the descendants of the root blocks first.
  for (const rootId of rootIds) {
    const order = state.blocks.order.get(rootId);
    if (order) {
      ids.push(...order);
    }
  }
  let index = 0;

// Add the descendants of the descendants, recursively.
  while (index < ids.length) {
    const id = ids[index];
    const order = state.blocks.order.get(id);
    if (order) {
      ids.splice(index + 1, 0, ...order);
    }
    index++;
  }
  return ids;
}, state => [state.blocks.order]);

/**
 * Returns an array containing the clientIds of the top-level blocks and
 * their descendants of any depth (for nested blocks). Ids are returned
 * in the same order that they appear in the editor.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {Array} ids of top-level and descendant blocks.
 */
const getClientIdsWithDescendants = state => getClientIdsOfDescendants(state, '');

/**
 * Returns the total number of blocks, or the total number of blocks with a specific name in a post.
 * The number returned includes nested blocks.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state     Global application state.
 * @param {?string} blockName Optional block name, if specified only blocks of that type will be counted.
 *
 * @return {number} Number of blocks in the post, or number of blocks with name equal to blockName.
 */
const getGlobalBlockCount = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, blockName) => {
  const clientIds = getClientIdsWithDescendants(state);
  if (!blockName) {
    return clientIds.length;
  }
  let count = 0;
  for (const clientId of clientIds) {
    const block = state.blocks.byClientId.get(clientId);
    if (block.name === blockName) {
      count++;
    }
  }
  return count;
}, state => [state.blocks.order, state.blocks.byClientId]);

/**
 * Returns all blocks that match a blockName. Results include nested blocks.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state     Global application state.
 * @param {?string} blockName Optional block name, if not specified, returns an empty array.
 *
 * @return {Array} Array of clientIds of blocks with name equal to blockName.
 */
const getBlocksByName = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, blockName) => {
  if (!blockName) {
    return selectors_EMPTY_ARRAY;
  }
  const blockNames = Array.isArray(blockName) ? blockName : [blockName];
  const clientIds = getClientIdsWithDescendants(state);
  const foundBlocks = clientIds.filter(clientId => {
    const block = state.blocks.byClientId.get(clientId);
    return blockNames.includes(block.name);
  });
  return foundBlocks.length > 0 ? foundBlocks : selectors_EMPTY_ARRAY;
}, state => [state.blocks.order, state.blocks.byClientId]);

/**
 * Returns all global blocks that match a blockName. Results include nested blocks.
 *
 * @deprecated
 *
 * @param {Object}  state     Global application state.
 * @param {?string} blockName Optional block name, if not specified, returns an empty array.
 *
 * @return {Array} Array of clientIds of blocks with name equal to blockName.
 */
function __experimentalGetGlobalBlocksByName(state, blockName) {
  external_wp_deprecated_default()("wp.data.select( 'core/block-editor' ).__experimentalGetGlobalBlocksByName", {
    since: '6.5',
    alternative: `wp.data.select( 'core/block-editor' ).getBlocksByName`
  });
  return getBlocksByName(state, blockName);
}

/**
 * Given an array of block client IDs, returns the corresponding array of block
 * objects.
 *
 * @param {Object}   state     Editor state.
 * @param {string[]} clientIds Client IDs for which blocks are to be returned.
 *
 * @return {WPBlock[]} Block objects.
 */
const getBlocksByClientId = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, clientIds) => (Array.isArray(clientIds) ? clientIds : [clientIds]).map(clientId => getBlock(state, clientId)), (state, clientIds) => (Array.isArray(clientIds) ? clientIds : [clientIds]).map(clientId => state.blocks.tree.get(clientId)));

/**
 * Given an array of block client IDs, returns the corresponding array of block
 * names.
 *
 * @param {Object}   state     Editor state.
 * @param {string[]} clientIds Client IDs for which block names are to be returned.
 *
 * @return {string[]} Block names.
 */
const getBlockNamesByClientId = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, clientIds) => getBlocksByClientId(state, clientIds).filter(Boolean).map(block => block.name), (state, clientIds) => getBlocksByClientId(state, clientIds));

/**
 * Returns the number of blocks currently present in the post.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state        Editor state.
 * @param {?string} rootClientId Optional root client ID of block list.
 *
 * @return {number} Number of blocks in the post.
 */
function getBlockCount(state, rootClientId) {
  return getBlockOrder(state, rootClientId).length;
}

/**
 * Returns the current selection start block client ID, attribute key and text
 * offset.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Block editor state.
 *
 * @return {WPBlockSelection} Selection start information.
 */
function getSelectionStart(state) {
  return state.selection.selectionStart;
}

/**
 * Returns the current selection end block client ID, attribute key and text
 * offset.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Block editor state.
 *
 * @return {WPBlockSelection} Selection end information.
 */
function getSelectionEnd(state) {
  return state.selection.selectionEnd;
}

/**
 * Returns the current block selection start. This value may be null, and it
 * may represent either a singular block selection or multi-selection start.
 * A selection is singular if its start and end match.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {?string} Client ID of block selection start.
 */
function getBlockSelectionStart(state) {
  return state.selection.selectionStart.clientId;
}

/**
 * Returns the current block selection end. This value may be null, and it
 * may represent either a singular block selection or multi-selection end.
 * A selection is singular if its start and end match.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {?string} Client ID of block selection end.
 */
function getBlockSelectionEnd(state) {
  return state.selection.selectionEnd.clientId;
}

/**
 * Returns the number of blocks currently selected in the post.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {number} Number of blocks selected in the post.
 */
function getSelectedBlockCount(state) {
  const multiSelectedBlockCount = getMultiSelectedBlockClientIds(state).length;
  if (multiSelectedBlockCount) {
    return multiSelectedBlockCount;
  }
  return state.selection.selectionStart.clientId ? 1 : 0;
}

/**
 * Returns true if there is a single selected block, or false otherwise.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether a single block is selected.
 */
function hasSelectedBlock(state) {
  const {
    selectionStart,
    selectionEnd
  } = state.selection;
  return !!selectionStart.clientId && selectionStart.clientId === selectionEnd.clientId;
}

/**
 * Returns the currently selected block client ID, or null if there is no
 * selected block.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {?string} Selected block client ID.
 */
function getSelectedBlockClientId(state) {
  const {
    selectionStart,
    selectionEnd
  } = state.selection;
  const {
    clientId
  } = selectionStart;
  if (!clientId || clientId !== selectionEnd.clientId) {
    return null;
  }
  return clientId;
}

/**
 * Returns the currently selected block, or null if there is no selected block.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {?Object} Selected block.
 */
function getSelectedBlock(state) {
  const clientId = getSelectedBlockClientId(state);
  return clientId ? getBlock(state, clientId) : null;
}

/**
 * Given a block client ID, returns the root block from which the block is
 * nested, an empty string for top-level blocks, or null if the block does not
 * exist.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientId Block from which to find root client ID.
 *
 * @return {?string} Root client ID, if exists
 */
function getBlockRootClientId(state, clientId) {
  var _state$blocks$parents;
  return (_state$blocks$parents = state.blocks.parents.get(clientId)) !== null && _state$blocks$parents !== void 0 ? _state$blocks$parents : null;
}

/**
 * Given a block client ID, returns the list of all its parents from top to bottom.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state     Editor state.
 * @param {string}  clientId  Block from which to find root client ID.
 * @param {boolean} ascending Order results from bottom to top (true) or top to bottom (false).
 *
 * @return {Array} ClientIDs of the parent blocks.
 */
const getBlockParents = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, clientId, ascending = false) => {
  const parents = [];
  let current = clientId;
  while (current = state.blocks.parents.get(current)) {
    parents.push(current);
  }
  if (!parents.length) {
    return selectors_EMPTY_ARRAY;
  }
  return ascending ? parents : parents.reverse();
}, state => [state.blocks.parents]);

/**
 * Given a block client ID and a block name, returns the list of all its parents
 * from top to bottom, filtered by the given name(s). For example, if passed
 * 'core/group' as the blockName, it will only return parents which are group
 * blocks. If passed `[ 'core/group', 'core/cover']`, as the blockName, it will
 * return parents which are group blocks and parents which are cover blocks.
 *
 * @param {Object}          state     Editor state.
 * @param {string}          clientId  Block from which to find root client ID.
 * @param {string|string[]} blockName Block name(s) to filter.
 * @param {boolean}         ascending Order results from bottom to top (true) or top to bottom (false).
 *
 * @return {Array} ClientIDs of the parent blocks.
 */
const getBlockParentsByBlockName = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, clientId, blockName, ascending = false) => {
  const parents = getBlockParents(state, clientId, ascending);
  const hasName = Array.isArray(blockName) ? name => blockName.includes(name) : name => blockName === name;
  return parents.filter(id => hasName(getBlockName(state, id)));
}, state => [state.blocks.parents]);
/**
 * Given a block client ID, returns the root of the hierarchy from which the block is nested, return the block itself for root level blocks.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientId Block from which to find root client ID.
 *
 * @return {string} Root client ID
 */
function getBlockHierarchyRootClientId(state, clientId) {
  let current = clientId;
  let parent;
  do {
    parent = current;
    current = state.blocks.parents.get(current);
  } while (current);
  return parent;
}

/**
 * Given a block client ID, returns the lowest common ancestor with selected client ID.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientId Block from which to find common ancestor client ID.
 *
 * @return {string} Common ancestor client ID or undefined
 */
function getLowestCommonAncestorWithSelectedBlock(state, clientId) {
  const selectedId = getSelectedBlockClientId(state);
  const clientParents = [...getBlockParents(state, clientId), clientId];
  const selectedParents = [...getBlockParents(state, selectedId), selectedId];
  let lowestCommonAncestor;
  const maxDepth = Math.min(clientParents.length, selectedParents.length);
  for (let index = 0; index < maxDepth; index++) {
    if (clientParents[index] === selectedParents[index]) {
      lowestCommonAncestor = clientParents[index];
    } else {
      break;
    }
  }
  return lowestCommonAncestor;
}

/**
 * Returns the client ID of the block adjacent one at the given reference
 * startClientId and modifier directionality. Defaults start startClientId to
 * the selected block, and direction as next block. Returns null if there is no
 * adjacent block.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state         Editor state.
 * @param {?string} startClientId Optional client ID of block from which to
 *                                search.
 * @param {?number} modifier      Directionality multiplier (1 next, -1
 *                                previous).
 *
 * @return {?string} Return the client ID of the block, or null if none exists.
 */
function getAdjacentBlockClientId(state, startClientId, modifier = 1) {
  // Default to selected block.
  if (startClientId === undefined) {
    startClientId = getSelectedBlockClientId(state);
  }

// Try multi-selection starting at extent based on modifier.
  if (startClientId === undefined) {
    if (modifier < 0) {
      startClientId = getFirstMultiSelectedBlockClientId(state);
    } else {
      startClientId = getLastMultiSelectedBlockClientId(state);
    }
  }

// Validate working start client ID.
  if (!startClientId) {
    return null;
  }

// Retrieve start block root client ID, being careful to allow the falsey
  // empty string top-level root by explicitly testing against null.
  const rootClientId = getBlockRootClientId(state, startClientId);
  if (rootClientId === null) {
    return null;
  }
  const {
    order
  } = state.blocks;
  const orderSet = order.get(rootClientId);
  const index = orderSet.indexOf(startClientId);
  const nextIndex = index + 1 * modifier;

// Block was first in set and we're attempting to get previous.
  if (nextIndex < 0) {
    return null;
  }

// Block was last in set and we're attempting to get next.
  if (nextIndex === orderSet.length) {
    return null;
  }

// Assume incremented index is within the set.
  return orderSet[nextIndex];
}

/**
 * Returns the previous block's client ID from the given reference start ID.
 * Defaults start to the selected block. Returns null if there is no previous
 * block.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state         Editor state.
 * @param {?string} startClientId Optional client ID of block from which to
 *                                search.
 *
 * @return {?string} Adjacent block's client ID, or null if none exists.
 */
function getPreviousBlockClientId(state, startClientId) {
  return getAdjacentBlockClientId(state, startClientId, -1);
}

/**
 * Returns the next block's client ID from the given reference start ID.
 * Defaults start to the selected block. Returns null if there is no next
 * block.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state         Editor state.
 * @param {?string} startClientId Optional client ID of block from which to
 *                                search.
 *
 * @return {?string} Adjacent block's client ID, or null if none exists.
 */
function getNextBlockClientId(state, startClientId) {
  return getAdjacentBlockClientId(state, startClientId, 1);
}

/* eslint-disable jsdoc/valid-types */
/**
 * Returns the initial caret position for the selected block.
 * This position is to used to position the caret properly when the selected block changes.
 * If the current block is not a RichText, having initial position set to 0 means "focus block"
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {0|-1|null} Initial position.
 */
function getSelectedBlocksInitialCaretPosition(state) {
  /* eslint-enable jsdoc/valid-types */
  return state.initialPosition;
}

/**
 * Returns the current selection set of block client IDs (multiselection or single selection).
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {Array} Multi-selected block client IDs.
 */
const getSelectedBlockClientIds = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)(state => {
  const {
    selectionStart,
    selectionEnd
  } = state.selection;
  if (!selectionStart.clientId || !selectionEnd.clientId) {
    return selectors_EMPTY_ARRAY;
  }
  if (selectionStart.clientId === selectionEnd.clientId) {
    return [selectionStart.clientId];
  }

// Retrieve root client ID to aid in retrieving relevant nested block
  // order, being careful to allow the falsey empty string top-level root
  // by explicitly testing against null.
  const rootClientId = getBlockRootClientId(state, selectionStart.clientId);
  if (rootClientId === null) {
    return selectors_EMPTY_ARRAY;
  }
  const blockOrder = getBlockOrder(state, rootClientId);
  const startIndex = blockOrder.indexOf(selectionStart.clientId);
  const endIndex = blockOrder.indexOf(selectionEnd.clientId);
  if (startIndex > endIndex) {
    return blockOrder.slice(endIndex, startIndex + 1);
  }
  return blockOrder.slice(startIndex, endIndex + 1);
}, state => [state.blocks.order, state.selection.selectionStart.clientId, state.selection.selectionEnd.clientId]);

/**
 * Returns the current multi-selection set of block client IDs, or an empty
 * array if there is no multi-selection.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {Array} Multi-selected block client IDs.
 */
function getMultiSelectedBlockClientIds(state) {
  const {
    selectionStart,
    selectionEnd
  } = state.selection;
  if (selectionStart.clientId === selectionEnd.clientId) {
    return selectors_EMPTY_ARRAY;
  }
  return getSelectedBlockClientIds(state);
}

/**
 * Returns the current multi-selection set of blocks, or an empty array if
 * there is no multi-selection.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {Array} Multi-selected block objects.
 */
const getMultiSelectedBlocks = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)(state => {
  const multiSelectedBlockClientIds = getMultiSelectedBlockClientIds(state);
  if (!multiSelectedBlockClientIds.length) {
    return selectors_EMPTY_ARRAY;
  }
  return multiSelectedBlockClientIds.map(clientId => getBlock(state, clientId));
}, state => [...getSelectedBlockClientIds.getDependants(state), state.blocks.byClientId, state.blocks.order, state.blocks.attributes]);

/**
 * Returns the client ID of the first block in the multi-selection set, or null
 * if there is no multi-selection.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {?string} First block client ID in the multi-selection set.
 */
function getFirstMultiSelectedBlockClientId(state) {
  return getMultiSelectedBlockClientIds(state)[0] || null;
}

/**
 * Returns the client ID of the last block in the multi-selection set, or null
 * if there is no multi-selection.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {?string} Last block client ID in the multi-selection set.
 */
function getLastMultiSelectedBlockClientId(state) {
  const selectedClientIds = getMultiSelectedBlockClientIds(state);
  return selectedClientIds[selectedClientIds.length - 1] || null;
}

/**
 * Returns true if a multi-selection exists, and the block corresponding to the
 * specified client ID is the first block of the multi-selection set, or false
 * otherwise.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientId Block client ID.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether block is first in multi-selection.
 */
function isFirstMultiSelectedBlock(state, clientId) {
  return getFirstMultiSelectedBlockClientId(state) === clientId;
}

/**
 * Returns true if the client ID occurs within the block multi-selection, or
 * false otherwise.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientId Block client ID.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether block is in multi-selection set.
 */
function isBlockMultiSelected(state, clientId) {
  return getMultiSelectedBlockClientIds(state).indexOf(clientId) !== -1;
}

/**
 * Returns true if an ancestor of the block is multi-selected, or false
 * otherwise.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientId Block client ID.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether an ancestor of the block is in multi-selection
 *                   set.
 */
const isAncestorMultiSelected = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, clientId) => {
  let ancestorClientId = clientId;
  let isMultiSelected = false;
  while (ancestorClientId && !isMultiSelected) {
    ancestorClientId = getBlockRootClientId(state, ancestorClientId);
    isMultiSelected = isBlockMultiSelected(state, ancestorClientId);
  }
  return isMultiSelected;
}, state => [state.blocks.order, state.selection.selectionStart.clientId, state.selection.selectionEnd.clientId]);

/**
 * Returns the client ID of the block which begins the multi-selection set, or
 * null if there is no multi-selection.
 *
 * This is not necessarily the first client ID in the selection.
 *
 * @see getFirstMultiSelectedBlockClientId
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {?string} Client ID of block beginning multi-selection.
 */
function getMultiSelectedBlocksStartClientId(state) {
  const {
    selectionStart,
    selectionEnd
  } = state.selection;
  if (selectionStart.clientId === selectionEnd.clientId) {
    return null;
  }
  return selectionStart.clientId || null;
}

/**
 * Returns the client ID of the block which ends the multi-selection set, or
 * null if there is no multi-selection.
 *
 * This is not necessarily the last client ID in the selection.
 *
 * @see getLastMultiSelectedBlockClientId
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {?string} Client ID of block ending multi-selection.
 */
function getMultiSelectedBlocksEndClientId(state) {
  const {
    selectionStart,
    selectionEnd
  } = state.selection;
  if (selectionStart.clientId === selectionEnd.clientId) {
    return null;
  }
  return selectionEnd.clientId || null;
}

/**
 * Returns true if the selection is not partial.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the selection is mergeable.
 */
function __unstableIsFullySelected(state) {
  const selectionAnchor = getSelectionStart(state);
  const selectionFocus = getSelectionEnd(state);
  return !selectionAnchor.attributeKey && !selectionFocus.attributeKey && typeof selectionAnchor.offset === 'undefined' && typeof selectionFocus.offset === 'undefined';
}

/**
 * Returns true if the selection is collapsed.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the selection is collapsed.
 */
function __unstableIsSelectionCollapsed(state) {
  const selectionAnchor = getSelectionStart(state);
  const selectionFocus = getSelectionEnd(state);
  return !!selectionAnchor && !!selectionFocus && selectionAnchor.clientId === selectionFocus.clientId && selectionAnchor.attributeKey === selectionFocus.attributeKey && selectionAnchor.offset === selectionFocus.offset;
}
function __unstableSelectionHasUnmergeableBlock(state) {
  return getSelectedBlockClientIds(state).some(clientId => {
    const blockName = getBlockName(state, clientId);
    const blockType = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockType)(blockName);
    return !blockType.merge;
  });
}

/**
 * Check whether the selection is mergeable.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state     Editor state.
 * @param {boolean} isForward Whether to merge forwards.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the selection is mergeable.
 */
function __unstableIsSelectionMergeable(state, isForward) {
  const selectionAnchor = getSelectionStart(state);
  const selectionFocus = getSelectionEnd(state);

// It's not mergeable if the start and end are within the same block.
  if (selectionAnchor.clientId === selectionFocus.clientId) {
    return false;
  }

// It's not mergeable if there's no rich text selection.
  if (!selectionAnchor.attributeKey || !selectionFocus.attributeKey || typeof selectionAnchor.offset === 'undefined' || typeof selectionFocus.offset === 'undefined') {
    return false;
  }
  const anchorRootClientId = getBlockRootClientId(state, selectionAnchor.clientId);
  const focusRootClientId = getBlockRootClientId(state, selectionFocus.clientId);

// It's not mergeable if the selection doesn't start and end in the same
  // block list. Maybe in the future it should be allowed.
  if (anchorRootClientId !== focusRootClientId) {
    return false;
  }
  const blockOrder = getBlockOrder(state, anchorRootClientId);
  const anchorIndex = blockOrder.indexOf(selectionAnchor.clientId);
  const focusIndex = blockOrder.indexOf(selectionFocus.clientId);

// It's mergeable if the blocks are of the same type.
  if (blockToMerge.name === targetBlockName) {
    return true;
  }

// If the blocks are of a different type, try to transform the block being
  // merged into the same type of block.
  const blocksToMerge = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.switchToBlockType)(blockToMerge, targetBlockName);
  return blocksToMerge && blocksToMerge.length;
}

/**
 * Get partial selected blocks with their content updated
 * based on the selection.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {Object[]} Updated partial selected blocks.
 */
const __unstableGetSelectedBlocksWithPartialSelection = state => {
  const selectionAnchor = getSelectionStart(state);
  const selectionFocus = getSelectionEnd(state);
  if (selectionAnchor.clientId === selectionFocus.clientId) {
    return selectors_EMPTY_ARRAY;
  }

// Can't split if the selection is not set.
  if (!selectionAnchor.attributeKey || !selectionFocus.attributeKey || typeof selectionAnchor.offset === 'undefined' || typeof selectionFocus.offset === 'undefined') {
    return selectors_EMPTY_ARRAY;
  }
  const anchorRootClientId = getBlockRootClientId(state, selectionAnchor.clientId);
  const focusRootClientId = getBlockRootClientId(state, selectionFocus.clientId);

// It's not splittable if the selection doesn't start and end in the same
  // block list. Maybe in the future it should be allowed.
  if (anchorRootClientId !== focusRootClientId) {
    return selectors_EMPTY_ARRAY;
  }
  const blockOrder = getBlockOrder(state, anchorRootClientId);
  const anchorIndex = blockOrder.indexOf(selectionAnchor.clientId);
  const focusIndex = blockOrder.indexOf(selectionFocus.clientId);

// Reassign selection start and end based on order.
  const [selectionStart, selectionEnd] = anchorIndex > focusIndex ? [selectionFocus, selectionAnchor] : [selectionAnchor, selectionFocus];
  const blockA = getBlock(state, selectionStart.clientId);
  const blockB = getBlock(state, selectionEnd.clientId);
  const htmlA = blockA.attributes[selectionStart.attributeKey];
  const htmlB = blockB.attributes[selectionEnd.attributeKey];
  let valueA = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.create)({
    html: htmlA
  });
  let valueB = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.create)({
    html: htmlB
  });
  valueA = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.remove)(valueA, 0, selectionStart.offset);
  valueB = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.remove)(valueB, selectionEnd.offset, valueB.text.length);
  return [{
    ...blockA,
    attributes: {
      ...blockA.attributes,
      [selectionStart.attributeKey]: (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.toHTMLString)({
        value: valueA
      })
    }
  }, {
    ...blockB,
    attributes: {
      ...blockB.attributes,
      [selectionEnd.attributeKey]: (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.toHTMLString)({
        value: valueB
      })
    }
  }];
};

/**
 * Returns an array containing all block client IDs in the editor in the order
 * they appear. Optionally accepts a root client ID of the block list for which
 * the order should be returned, defaulting to the top-level block order.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state        Editor state.
 * @param {?string} rootClientId Optional root client ID of block list.
 *
 * @return {Array} Ordered client IDs of editor blocks.
 */
function getBlockOrder(state, rootClientId) {
  return state.blocks.order.get(rootClientId || '') || selectors_EMPTY_ARRAY;
}

/**
 * Returns the index at which the block corresponding to the specified client
 * ID occurs within the block order, or `-1` if the block does not exist.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientId Block client ID.
 *
 * @return {number} Index at which block exists in order.
 */
function getBlockIndex(state, clientId) {
  const rootClientId = getBlockRootClientId(state, clientId);
  return getBlockOrder(state, rootClientId).indexOf(clientId);
}

/**
 * Returns true if the block corresponding to the specified client ID is
 * currently selected and no multi-selection exists, or false otherwise.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientId Block client ID.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether block is selected and multi-selection exists.
 */
function isBlockSelected(state, clientId) {
  const {
    selectionStart,
    selectionEnd
  } = state.selection;
  if (selectionStart.clientId !== selectionEnd.clientId) {
    return false;
  }
  return selectionStart.clientId === clientId;
}

/**
 * Returns true if one of the block's inner blocks is selected.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state    Editor state.
 * @param {string}  clientId Block client ID.
 * @param {boolean} deep     Perform a deep check.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the block has an inner block selected
 */
function hasSelectedInnerBlock(state, clientId, deep = false) {
  const selectedBlockClientIds = getSelectedBlockClientIds(state);
  if (!selectedBlockClientIds.length) {
    return false;
  }
  if (deep) {
    return selectedBlockClientIds.some(id =>
    // Pass true because we don't care about order and it's more
    // performant.
    getBlockParents(state, id, true).includes(clientId));
  }
  return selectedBlockClientIds.some(id => getBlockRootClientId(state, id) === clientId);
}

/**
 * Returns true if one of the block's inner blocks is dragged.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state    Editor state.
 * @param {string}  clientId Block client ID.
 * @param {boolean} deep     Perform a deep check.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the block has an inner block dragged
 */
function hasDraggedInnerBlock(state, clientId, deep = false) {
  return getBlockOrder(state, clientId).some(innerClientId => isBlockBeingDragged(state, innerClientId) || deep && hasDraggedInnerBlock(state, innerClientId, deep));
}

/**
 * Returns true if the block corresponding to the specified client ID is
 * currently selected but isn't the last of the selected blocks. Here "last"
 * refers to the block sequence in the document, _not_ the sequence of
 * multi-selection, which is why `state.selectionEnd` isn't used.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientId Block client ID.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether block is selected and not the last in the
 *                   selection.
 */
function isBlockWithinSelection(state, clientId) {
  if (!clientId) {
    return false;
  }
  const clientIds = getMultiSelectedBlockClientIds(state);
  const index = clientIds.indexOf(clientId);
  return index > -1 && index < clientIds.length - 1;
}

/**
 * Returns true if a multi-selection has been made, or false otherwise.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether multi-selection has been made.
 */
function hasMultiSelection(state) {
  const {
    selectionStart,
    selectionEnd
  } = state.selection;
  return selectionStart.clientId !== selectionEnd.clientId;
}

/**
 * Whether in the process of multi-selecting or not. This flag is only true
 * while the multi-selection is being selected (by mouse move), and is false
 * once the multi-selection has been settled.
 *
 * @see hasMultiSelection
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {boolean} True if multi-selecting, false if not.
 */
function selectors_isMultiSelecting(state) {
  return state.isMultiSelecting;
}

/**
 * Selector that returns if multi-selection is enabled or not.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {boolean} True if it should be possible to multi-select blocks, false if multi-selection is disabled.
 */
function selectors_isSelectionEnabled(state) {
  return state.isSelectionEnabled;
}

/**
 * Returns the block's editing mode, defaulting to "visual" if not explicitly
 * assigned.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientId Block client ID.
 *
 * @return {Object} Block editing mode.
 */
function getBlockMode(state, clientId) {
  return state.blocksMode[clientId] || 'visual';
}

/**
 * Returns true if the user is typing, or false otherwise.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether user is typing.
 */
function selectors_isTyping(state) {
  return state.isTyping;
}

/**
 * Returns true if the user is dragging blocks, or false otherwise.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether user is dragging blocks.
 */
function isDraggingBlocks(state) {
  return !!state.draggedBlocks.length;
}

/**
 * Returns the client ids of any blocks being directly dragged.
 *
 * This does not include children of a parent being dragged.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {string[]} Array of dragged block client ids.
 */
function getDraggedBlockClientIds(state) {
  return state.draggedBlocks;
}

/**
 * Returns whether the block is being dragged.
 *
 * Only returns true if the block is being directly dragged,
 * not if the block is a child of a parent being dragged.
 * See `isAncestorBeingDragged` for child blocks.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Global application state.
 * @param {string} clientId Client id for block to check.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the block is being dragged.
 */
function isBlockBeingDragged(state, clientId) {
  return state.draggedBlocks.includes(clientId);
}

/**
 * Returns whether a parent/ancestor of the block is being dragged.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Global application state.
 * @param {string} clientId Client id for block to check.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the block's ancestor is being dragged.
 */
function isAncestorBeingDragged(state, clientId) {
  // Return early if no blocks are being dragged rather than
  // the more expensive check for parents.
  if (!isDraggingBlocks(state)) {
    return false;
  }
  const parents = getBlockParents(state, clientId);
  return parents.some(parentClientId => isBlockBeingDragged(state, parentClientId));
}

/**
 * Returns true if the caret is within formatted text, or false otherwise.
 *
 * @deprecated
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the caret is within formatted text.
 */
function isCaretWithinFormattedText() {
  external_wp_deprecated_default()('wp.data.select( "core/block-editor" ).isCaretWithinFormattedText', {
    since: '6.1',
    version: '6.3'
  });
  return false;
}

/**
 * Returns the insertion point, the index at which the new inserted block would
 * be placed. Defaults to the last index.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {Object} Insertion point object with `rootClientId`, `index`.
 */
const getBlockInsertionPoint = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)(state => {
  let rootClientId, index;
  const {
    insertionPoint,
    selection: {
      selectionEnd
    }
  } = state;
  if (insertionPoint !== null) {
    return insertionPoint;
  }
  const {
    clientId
  } = selectionEnd;
  if (clientId) {
    rootClientId = getBlockRootClientId(state, clientId) || undefined;
    index = getBlockIndex(state, selectionEnd.clientId) + 1;
  } else {
    index = getBlockOrder(state).length;
  }
  return {
    rootClientId,
    index
  };
}, state => [state.insertionPoint, state.selection.selectionEnd.clientId, state.blocks.parents, state.blocks.order]);

/**
 * Returns true if we should show the block insertion point.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {?boolean} Whether the insertion point is visible or not.
 */
function isBlockInsertionPointVisible(state) {
  return state.insertionPoint !== null;
}

/**
 * Returns whether the blocks matches the template or not.
 *
 * @param {boolean} state
 * @return {?boolean} Whether the template is valid or not.
 */
function isValidTemplate(state) {
  return state.template.isValid;
}

/**
 * Returns the defined block template
 *
 * @param {boolean} state
 *
 * @return {?Array} Block Template.
 */
function getTemplate(state) {
  return state.settings.template;
}

/**
 * Returns the defined block template lock. Optionally accepts a root block
 * client ID as context, otherwise defaulting to the global context.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state        Editor state.
 * @param {?string} rootClientId Optional block root client ID.
 *
 * @return {string|false} Block Template Lock
 */
function getTemplateLock(state, rootClientId) {
  var _getBlockListSettings;
  if (!rootClientId) {
    var _state$settings$templ;
    return (_state$settings$templ = state.settings.templateLock) !== null && _state$settings$templ !== void 0 ? _state$settings$templ : false;
  }
  return (_getBlockListSettings = getBlockListSettings(state, rootClientId)?.templateLock) !== null && _getBlockListSettings !== void 0 ? _getBlockListSettings : false;
}

/**
 * Determines if the given block type is allowed to be inserted into the block list.
 * This function is not exported and not memoized because using a memoized selector
 * inside another memoized selector is just a waste of time.
 *
 * @param {Object}        state        Editor state.
 * @param {string|Object} blockName    The block type object, e.g., the response
 *                                     from the block directory; or a string name of
 *                                     an installed block type, e.g.' core/paragraph'.
 * @param {?string}       rootClientId Optional root client ID of block list.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the given block type is allowed to be inserted.
 */
const canInsertBlockTypeUnmemoized = (state, blockName, rootClientId = null) => {
  let blockType;
  if (blockName && 'object' === typeof blockName) {
    blockType = blockName;
    blockName = blockType.name;
  } else {
    blockType = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockType)(blockName);
  }
  if (!blockType) {
    return false;
  }
  const {
    allowedBlockTypes
  } = getSettings(state);
  const isBlockAllowedInEditor = checkAllowList(allowedBlockTypes, blockName, true);
  if (!isBlockAllowedInEditor) {
    return false;
  }
  const isLocked = !!getTemplateLock(state, rootClientId);
  if (isLocked) {
    return false;
  }
  if (getBlockEditingMode(state, rootClientId !== null && rootClientId !== void 0 ? rootClientId : '') === 'disabled') {
    return false;
  }
  const parentBlockListSettings = getBlockListSettings(state, rootClientId);

// The parent block doesn't have settings indicating it doesn't support
  // inner blocks, return false.
  if (rootClientId && parentBlockListSettings === undefined) {
    return false;
  }
  const parentName = getBlockName(state, rootClientId);
  const parentBlockType = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockType)(parentName);

// Look at the `blockType.allowedBlocks` field to determine whether this is an allowed child block.
  const parentAllowedChildBlocks = parentBlockType?.allowedBlocks;
  let hasParentAllowedBlock = checkAllowList(parentAllowedChildBlocks, blockName);

// The `allowedBlocks` block list setting can further limit which blocks are allowed children.
  if (hasParentAllowedBlock !== false) {
    const parentAllowedBlocks = parentBlockListSettings?.allowedBlocks;
    const hasParentListAllowedBlock = checkAllowList(parentAllowedBlocks, blockName);
    // Never downgrade the result from `true` to `null`
    if (hasParentListAllowedBlock !== null) {
      hasParentAllowedBlock = hasParentListAllowedBlock;
    }
  }
  const blockAllowedParentBlocks = blockType.parent;
  const hasBlockAllowedParent = checkAllowList(blockAllowedParentBlocks, parentName);
  let hasBlockAllowedAncestor = true;
  const blockAllowedAncestorBlocks = blockType.ancestor;
  if (blockAllowedAncestorBlocks) {
    const ancestors = [rootClientId, ...getBlockParents(state, rootClientId)];
    hasBlockAllowedAncestor = ancestors.some(ancestorClientId => checkAllowList(blockAllowedAncestorBlocks, getBlockName(state, ancestorClientId)));
  }
  const canInsert = hasBlockAllowedAncestor && (hasParentAllowedBlock === null && hasBlockAllowedParent === null || hasParentAllowedBlock === true || hasBlockAllowedParent === true);
  if (!canInsert) {
    return canInsert;
  }

/**
   * This filter is an ad-hoc solution to prevent adding template parts inside post content.
   * Conceptually, having a filter inside a selector is bad pattern so this code will be
   * replaced by a declarative API that doesn't the following drawbacks:
   *
   * Filters are not reactive: Upon switching between "template mode" and non "template mode",
   * the filter and selector won't necessarily be executed again. For now, it doesn't matter much
   * because you can't switch between the two modes while the inserter stays open.
   *
   * Filters are global: Once they're defined, they will affect all editor instances and all registries.
   * An ideal API would only affect specific editor instances.
   */
  return (0,external_wp_hooks_namespaceObject.applyFilters)('blockEditor.__unstableCanInsertBlockType', canInsert, blockType, rootClientId, {
    // Pass bound selectors of the current registry. If we're in a nested
    // context, the data will differ from the one selected from the root
    // registry.
    getBlock: getBlock.bind(null, state),
    getBlockParentsByBlockName: getBlockParentsByBlockName.bind(null, state)
  });
};

/**
 * Determines if the given block type is allowed to be inserted into the block list.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state        Editor state.
 * @param {string}  blockName    The name of the block type, e.g.' core/paragraph'.
 * @param {?string} rootClientId Optional root client ID of block list.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the given block type is allowed to be inserted.
 */
const canInsertBlockType = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)(canInsertBlockTypeUnmemoized, (state, blockName, rootClientId) => getInsertBlockTypeDependants(state, rootClientId));

/**
 * Determines if the given blocks are allowed to be inserted into the block
 * list.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state        Editor state.
 * @param {string}  clientIds    The block client IDs to be inserted.
 * @param {?string} rootClientId Optional root client ID of block list.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the given blocks are allowed to be inserted.
 */
function canInsertBlocks(state, clientIds, rootClientId = null) {
  return clientIds.every(id => canInsertBlockType(state, getBlockName(state, id), rootClientId));
}

/**
 * Determines if the given block is allowed to be deleted.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientId The block client Id.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the given block is allowed to be removed.
 */
function canRemoveBlock(state, clientId) {
  const attributes = getBlockAttributes(state, clientId);
  if (attributes === null) {
    return true;
  }
  if (attributes.lock?.remove !== undefined) {
    return !attributes.lock.remove;
  }
  const rootClientId = getBlockRootClientId(state, clientId);
  if (getTemplateLock(state, rootClientId)) {
    return false;
  }
  return getBlockEditingMode(state, rootClientId) !== 'disabled';
}

/**
 * Determines if the given blocks are allowed to be removed.
 *
 * @param {Object} state     Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientIds The block client IDs to be removed.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the given blocks are allowed to be removed.
 */
function canRemoveBlocks(state, clientIds) {
  return clientIds.every(clientId => canRemoveBlock(state, clientId));
}

/**
 * Determines if the given block is allowed to be moved.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientId The block client Id.
 *
 * @return {boolean | undefined} Whether the given block is allowed to be moved.
 */
function canMoveBlock(state, clientId) {
  const attributes = getBlockAttributes(state, clientId);
  if (attributes === null) {
    return true;
  }
  if (attributes.lock?.move !== undefined) {
    return !attributes.lock.move;
  }
  const rootClientId = getBlockRootClientId(state, clientId);
  if (getTemplateLock(state, rootClientId) === 'all') {
    return false;
  }
  return getBlockEditingMode(state, rootClientId) !== 'disabled';
}

/**
 * Determines if the given blocks are allowed to be moved.
 *
 * @param {Object} state     Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientIds The block client IDs to be moved.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the given blocks are allowed to be moved.
 */
function canMoveBlocks(state, clientIds) {
  return clientIds.every(clientId => canMoveBlock(state, clientId));
}

/**
 * Determines if the given block is allowed to be edited.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Editor state.
 * @param {string} clientId The block client Id.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the given block is allowed to be edited.
 */
function canEditBlock(state, clientId) {
  const attributes = getBlockAttributes(state, clientId);
  if (attributes === null) {
    return true;
  }
  const {
    lock
  } = attributes;

// When the edit is true, we cannot edit the block.
  return !lock?.edit;
}

/**
 * Determines if the given block type can be locked/unlocked by a user.
 *
 * @param {Object}          state      Editor state.
 * @param {(string|Object)} nameOrType Block name or type object.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether a given block type can be locked/unlocked.
 */
function canLockBlockType(state, nameOrType) {
  if (!(0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.hasBlockSupport)(nameOrType, 'lock', true)) {
    return false;
  }

// Use block editor settings as the default value.
  return !!state.settings?.canLockBlocks;
}

/**
 * Returns information about how recently and frequently a block has been inserted.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 * @param {string} id    A string which identifies the insert, e.g. 'core/block/12'
 *
 * @return {?{ time: number, count: number }} An object containing `time` which is when the last
 *                                            insert occurred as a UNIX epoch, and `count` which is
 *                                            the number of inserts that have occurred.
 */
function getInsertUsage(state, id) {
  var _state$preferences$in;
  return (_state$preferences$in = state.preferences.insertUsage?.[id]) !== null && _state$preferences$in !== void 0 ? _state$preferences$in : null;
}

/**
 * Returns whether we can show a block type in the inserter
 *
 * @param {Object}  state        Global State
 * @param {Object}  blockType    BlockType
 * @param {?string} rootClientId Optional root client ID of block list.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the given block type is allowed to be shown in the inserter.
 */
const canIncludeBlockTypeInInserter = (state, blockType, rootClientId) => {
  if (!(0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.hasBlockSupport)(blockType, 'inserter', true)) {
    return false;
  }
  return canInsertBlockTypeUnmemoized(state, blockType.name, rootClientId);
};

/**
 * Return a function to be used to tranform a block variation to an inserter item
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global State
 * @param {Object} item  Denormalized inserter item
 * @return {Function} Function to transform a block variation to inserter item
 */
const getItemFromVariation = (state, item) => variation => {
  const variationId = `${item.id}/${variation.name}`;
  const {
    time,
    count = 0
  } = getInsertUsage(state, variationId) || {};
  return {
    ...item,
    id: variationId,
    icon: variation.icon || item.icon,
    title: variation.title || item.title,
    description: variation.description || item.description,
    category: variation.category || item.category,
    // If `example` is explicitly undefined for the variation, the preview will not be shown.
    example: variation.hasOwnProperty('example') ? variation.example : item.example,
    initialAttributes: {
      ...item.initialAttributes,
      ...variation.attributes
    },
    innerBlocks: variation.innerBlocks,
    keywords: variation.keywords || item.keywords,
    frecency: calculateFrecency(time, count)
  };
};

/**
 * Returns the calculated frecency.
 *
 * 'frecency' is a heuristic (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Frecency)
 * that combines block usage frequenty and recency.
 *
 * @param {number} time  When the last insert occurred as a UNIX epoch
 * @param {number} count The number of inserts that have occurred.
 *
 * @return {number} The calculated frecency.
 */
const calculateFrecency = (time, count) => {
  if (!time) {
    return count;
  }
  // The selector is cached, which means Date.now() is the last time that the
  // relevant state changed. This suits our needs.
  const duration = Date.now() - time;
  switch (true) {
    case duration < MILLISECONDS_PER_HOUR:
      return count * 4;
    case duration < MILLISECONDS_PER_DAY:
      return count * 2;
    case duration < MILLISECONDS_PER_WEEK:
      return count / 2;
    default:
      return count / 4;
  }
};

/**
 * Returns a function that accepts a block type and builds an item to be shown
 * in a specific context. It's used for building items for Inserter and available
 * block Transfroms list.
 *
 * @param {Object} state              Editor state.
 * @param {Object} options            Options object for handling the building of a block type.
 * @param {string} options.buildScope The scope for which the item is going to be used.
 * @return {Function} Function returns an item to be shown in a specific context (Inserter|Transforms list).
 */
const buildBlockTypeItem = (state, {
  buildScope = 'inserter'
}) => blockType => {
  const id = blockType.name;
  let isDisabled = false;
  if (!(0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.hasBlockSupport)(blockType.name, 'multiple', true)) {
    isDisabled = getBlocksByClientId(state, getClientIdsWithDescendants(state)).some(({
      name
    }) => name === blockType.name);
  }
  const {
    time,
    count = 0
  } = getInsertUsage(state, id) || {};
  const blockItemBase = {
    id,
    name: blockType.name,
    title: blockType.title,
    icon: blockType.icon,
    isDisabled,
    frecency: calculateFrecency(time, count)
  };
  if (buildScope === 'transform') {
    return blockItemBase;
  }
  const inserterVariations = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockVariations)(blockType.name, 'inserter');
  return {
    ...blockItemBase,
    initialAttributes: {},
    description: blockType.description,
    category: blockType.category,
    keywords: blockType.keywords,
    variations: inserterVariations,
    example: blockType.example,
    utility: 1 // Deprecated.
  };
};

/**
 * Determines the items that appear in the inserter. Includes both static
 * items (e.g. a regular block type) and dynamic items (e.g. a reusable block).
 *
 * Each item object contains what's necessary to display a button in the
 * inserter and handle its selection.
 *
 * The 'frecency' property is a heuristic (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Frecency)
 * that combines block usage frequenty and recency.
 *
 * Items are returned ordered descendingly by their 'utility' and 'frecency'.
 *
 * @param    {Object}   state             Editor state.
 * @param    {?string}  rootClientId      Optional root client ID of block list.
 *
 * @return {WPEditorInserterItem[]} Items that appear in inserter.
 *
 * @typedef {Object} WPEditorInserterItem
 * @property {string}   id                Unique identifier for the item.
 * @property {string}   name              The type of block to create.
 * @property {Object}   initialAttributes Attributes to pass to the newly created block.
 * @property {string}   title             Title of the item, as it appears in the inserter.
 * @property {string}   icon              Dashicon for the item, as it appears in the inserter.
 * @property {string}   category          Block category that the item is associated with.
 * @property {string[]} keywords          Keywords that can be searched to find this item.
 * @property {boolean}  isDisabled        Whether or not the user should be prevented from inserting
 *                                        this item.
 * @property {number}   frecency          Heuristic that combines frequency and recency.
 */
const getInserterItems = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createRegistrySelector)(select => (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, rootClientId = null, options = EMPTY_OBJECT) => {
  const buildReusableBlockInserterItem = reusableBlock => {
    const icon = !reusableBlock.wp_pattern_sync_status ? {
      src: library_symbol,
      foreground: 'var(--wp-block-synced-color)'
    } : library_symbol;
    const id = `core/block/${reusableBlock.id}`;
    const {
      time,
      count = 0
    } = getInsertUsage(state, id) || {};
    const frecency = calculateFrecency(time, count);
    return {
      id,
      name: 'core/block',
      initialAttributes: {
        ref: reusableBlock.id
      },
      title: reusableBlock.title?.raw,
      icon,
      category: 'reusable',
      keywords: ['reusable'],
      isDisabled: false,
      utility: 1,
      // Deprecated.
      frecency,
      content: reusableBlock.content?.raw,
      syncStatus: reusableBlock.wp_pattern_sync_status
    };
  };
  const syncedPatternInserterItems = canInsertBlockTypeUnmemoized(state, 'core/block', rootClientId) ? unlock(select(STORE_NAME)).getReusableBlocks().map(buildReusableBlockInserterItem) : [];
  const buildBlockTypeInserterItem = buildBlockTypeItem(state, {
    buildScope: 'inserter'
  });
  let blockTypeInserterItems = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockTypes)().filter(blockType => (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.hasBlockSupport)(blockType, 'inserter', true)).map(buildBlockTypeInserterItem);
  if (options[withRootClientIdOptionKey]) {
    blockTypeInserterItems = blockTypeInserterItems.reduce((accumulator, item) => {
      item.rootClientId = rootClientId !== null && rootClientId !== void 0 ? rootClientId : '';
      while (!canInsertBlockTypeUnmemoized(state, item.name, item.rootClientId)) {
        if (!item.rootClientId) {
          let sectionRootClientId;
          try {
            sectionRootClientId = unlock(getSettings(state)).sectionRootClientId;
          } catch (e) {}
          if (sectionRootClientId && canInsertBlockTypeUnmemoized(state, item.name, sectionRootClientId)) {
            item.rootClientId = sectionRootClientId;
          } else {
            delete item.rootClientId;
          }
          break;
        } else {
          const parentClientId = getBlockRootClientId(state, item.rootClientId);
          item.rootClientId = parentClientId;
        }
      }

// We could also add non insertable items and gray them out.
      if (item.hasOwnProperty('rootClientId')) {
        accumulator.push(item);
      }
      return accumulator;
    }, []);
  } else {
    blockTypeInserterItems = blockTypeInserterItems.filter(blockType => canIncludeBlockTypeInInserter(state, blockType, rootClientId));
  }
  const items = blockTypeInserterItems.reduce((accumulator, item) => {
    const {
      variations = []
    } = item;
    // Exclude any block type item that is to be replaced by a default variation.
    if (!variations.some(({
      isDefault
    }) => isDefault)) {
      accumulator.push(item);
    }
    if (variations.length) {
      const variationMapper = getItemFromVariation(state, item);
      accumulator.push(...variations.map(variationMapper));
    }
    return accumulator;
  }, []);

// Ensure core blocks are prioritized in the returned results,
  // because third party blocks can be registered earlier than
  // the core blocks (usually by using the `init` action),
  // thus affecting the display order.
  // We don't sort reusable blocks as they are handled differently.
  const groupByType = (blocks, block) => {
    const {
      core,
      noncore
    } = blocks;
    const type = block.name.startsWith('core/') ? core : noncore;
    type.push(block);
    return blocks;
  };
  const {
    core: coreItems,
    noncore: nonCoreItems
  } = items.reduce(groupByType, {
    core: [],
    noncore: []
  });
  const sortedBlockTypes = [...coreItems, ...nonCoreItems];
  return [...sortedBlockTypes, ...syncedPatternInserterItems];
}, (state, rootClientId) => [(0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockTypes)(), unlock(select(STORE_NAME)).getReusableBlocks(), state.blocks.order, state.preferences.insertUsage, ...getInsertBlockTypeDependants(state, rootClientId)]));

/**
 * Determines the items that appear in the available block transforms list.
 *
 * Each item object contains what's necessary to display a menu item in the
 * transform list and handle its selection.
 *
 * The 'frecency' property is a heuristic (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Frecency)
 * that combines block usage frequenty and recency.
 *
 * Items are returned ordered descendingly by their 'frecency'.
 *
 * @param    {Object}          state        Editor state.
 * @param    {Object|Object[]} blocks       Block object or array objects.
 * @param    {?string}         rootClientId Optional root client ID of block list.
 *
 * @return {WPEditorTransformItem[]} Items that appear in inserter.
 *
 * @typedef {Object} WPEditorTransformItem
 * @property {string}          id           Unique identifier for the item.
 * @property {string}          name         The type of block to create.
 * @property {string}          title        Title of the item, as it appears in the inserter.
 * @property {string}          icon         Dashicon for the item, as it appears in the inserter.
 * @property {boolean}         isDisabled   Whether or not the user should be prevented from inserting
 *                                          this item.
 * @property {number}          frecency     Heuristic that combines frequency and recency.
 */
const getBlockTransformItems = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, blocks, rootClientId = null) => {
  const normalizedBlocks = Array.isArray(blocks) ? blocks : [blocks];
  const buildBlockTypeTransformItem = buildBlockTypeItem(state, {
    buildScope: 'transform'
  });
  const blockTypeTransformItems = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockTypes)().filter(blockType => canIncludeBlockTypeInInserter(state, blockType, rootClientId)).map(buildBlockTypeTransformItem);
  const itemsByName = Object.fromEntries(Object.entries(blockTypeTransformItems).map(([, value]) => [value.name, value]));
  const possibleTransforms = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getPossibleBlockTransformations)(normalizedBlocks).reduce((accumulator, block) => {
    if (itemsByName[block?.name]) {
      accumulator.push(itemsByName[block.name]);
    }
    return accumulator;
  }, []);
  return orderBy(possibleTransforms, block => itemsByName[block.name].frecency, 'desc');
}, (state, blocks, rootClientId) => [(0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockTypes)(), state.preferences.insertUsage, ...getInsertBlockTypeDependants(state, rootClientId)]);

/**
 * Determines whether there are items to show in the inserter.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state        Editor state.
 * @param {?string} rootClientId Optional root client ID of block list.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Items that appear in inserter.
 */
const hasInserterItems = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createRegistrySelector)(select => (state, rootClientId = null) => {
  const hasBlockType = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockTypes)().some(blockType => canIncludeBlockTypeInInserter(state, blockType, rootClientId));
  if (hasBlockType) {
    return true;
  }
  const hasReusableBlock = canInsertBlockTypeUnmemoized(state, 'core/block', rootClientId) && unlock(select(STORE_NAME)).getReusableBlocks().length > 0;
  return hasReusableBlock;
});

/**
 * Returns the list of allowed inserter blocks for inner blocks children.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state        Editor state.
 * @param {?string} rootClientId Optional root client ID of block list.
 *
 * @return {Array?} The list of allowed block types.
 */
const getAllowedBlocks = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createRegistrySelector)(select => (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, rootClientId = null) => {
  if (!rootClientId) {
    return;
  }
  const blockTypes = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockTypes)().filter(blockType => canIncludeBlockTypeInInserter(state, blockType, rootClientId));
  const hasReusableBlock = canInsertBlockTypeUnmemoized(state, 'core/block', rootClientId) && unlock(select(STORE_NAME)).getReusableBlocks().length > 0;
  if (hasReusableBlock) {
    blockTypes.push('core/block');
  }
  return blockTypes;
}, (state, rootClientId) => [(0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockTypes)(), unlock(select(STORE_NAME)).getReusableBlocks(), ...getInsertBlockTypeDependants(state, rootClientId)]));
const __experimentalGetAllowedBlocks = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, rootClientId = null) => {
  external_wp_deprecated_default()('wp.data.select( "core/block-editor" ).__experimentalGetAllowedBlocks', {
    alternative: 'wp.data.select( "core/block-editor" ).getAllowedBlocks',
    since: '6.2',
    version: '6.4'
  });
  return getAllowedBlocks(state, rootClientId);
}, (state, rootClientId) => getAllowedBlocks.getDependants(state, rootClientId));

/**
 * Returns the block to be directly inserted by the block appender.
 *
 * @param    {Object}         state            Editor state.
 * @param    {?string}        rootClientId     Optional root client ID of block list.
 *
 * @return {WPDirectInsertBlock|undefined}              The block type to be directly inserted.
 *
 * @typedef {Object} WPDirectInsertBlock
 * @property {string}         name             The type of block.
 * @property {?Object}        attributes       Attributes to pass to the newly created block.
 * @property {?Array<string>} attributesToCopy Attributes to be copied from adjecent blocks when inserted.
 */
function getDirectInsertBlock(state, rootClientId = null) {
  var _state$blockListSetti;
  if (!rootClientId) {
    return;
  }
  const {
    defaultBlock,
    directInsert
  } = (_state$blockListSetti = state.blockListSettings[rootClientId]) !== null && _state$blockListSetti !== void 0 ? _state$blockListSetti : {};
  if (!defaultBlock || !directInsert) {
    return;
  }
  return defaultBlock;
}
function __experimentalGetDirectInsertBlock(state, rootClientId = null) {
  external_wp_deprecated_default()('wp.data.select( "core/block-editor" ).__experimentalGetDirectInsertBlock', {
    alternative: 'wp.data.select( "core/block-editor" ).getDirectInsertBlock',
    since: '6.3',
    version: '6.4'
  });
  return getDirectInsertBlock(state, rootClientId);
}
const __experimentalGetParsedPattern = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createRegistrySelector)(select => (state, patternName) => {
  const pattern = unlock(select(STORE_NAME)).getPatternBySlug(patternName);
  return pattern ? getParsedPattern(pattern) : null;
});
const getAllowedPatternsDependants = select => (state, rootClientId) => [...getAllPatternsDependants(select)(state), ...getInsertBlockTypeDependants(state, rootClientId)];

/**
 * Returns the list of allowed patterns for inner blocks children.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state        Editor state.
 * @param {?string} rootClientId Optional target root client ID.
 *
 * @return {Array?} The list of allowed patterns.
 */
const __experimentalGetAllowedPatterns = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createRegistrySelector)(select => {
  return (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, rootClientId = null) => {
    const {
      getAllPatterns
    } = unlock(select(STORE_NAME));
    const patterns = getAllPatterns();
    const {
      allowedBlockTypes
    } = getSettings(state);
    const parsedPatterns = patterns.filter(({
      inserter = true
    }) => !!inserter).map(getParsedPattern);
    const availableParsedPatterns = parsedPatterns.filter(({
      blocks
    }) => checkAllowListRecursive(blocks, allowedBlockTypes));
    const patternsAllowed = availableParsedPatterns.filter(({
      blocks
    }) => blocks.every(({
      name
    }) => canInsertBlockType(state, name, rootClientId)));
    return patternsAllowed;
  }, getAllowedPatternsDependants(select));
});

/**
 * Returns the list of patterns based on their declared `blockTypes`
 * and a block's name.
 * Patterns can use `blockTypes` to integrate in work flows like
 * suggesting appropriate patterns in a Placeholder state(during insertion)
 * or blocks transformations.
 *
 * @param {Object}          state        Editor state.
 * @param {string|string[]} blockNames   Block's name or array of block names to find matching pattens.
 * @param {?string}         rootClientId Optional target root client ID.
 *
 * @return {Array} The list of matched block patterns based on declared `blockTypes` and block name.
 */
const getPatternsByBlockTypes = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createRegistrySelector)(select => (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, blockNames, rootClientId = null) => {
  if (!blockNames) {
    return selectors_EMPTY_ARRAY;
  }
  const patterns = select(STORE_NAME).__experimentalGetAllowedPatterns(rootClientId);
  const normalizedBlockNames = Array.isArray(blockNames) ? blockNames : [blockNames];
  const filteredPatterns = patterns.filter(pattern => pattern?.blockTypes?.some?.(blockName => normalizedBlockNames.includes(blockName)));
  if (filteredPatterns.length === 0) {
    return selectors_EMPTY_ARRAY;
  }
  return filteredPatterns;
}, (state, blockNames, rootClientId) => getAllowedPatternsDependants(select)(state, rootClientId)));
const __experimentalGetPatternsByBlockTypes = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createRegistrySelector)(select => {
  external_wp_deprecated_default()('wp.data.select( "core/block-editor" ).__experimentalGetPatternsByBlockTypes', {
    alternative: 'wp.data.select( "core/block-editor" ).getPatternsByBlockTypes',
    since: '6.2',
    version: '6.4'
  });
  return select(STORE_NAME).getPatternsByBlockTypes;
});

/**
 * Determines the items that appear in the available pattern transforms list.
 *
 * For now we only handle blocks without InnerBlocks and take into account
 * the `__experimentalRole` property of blocks' attributes for the transformation.
 *
 * We return the first set of possible eligible block patterns,
 * by checking the `blockTypes` property. We still have to recurse through
 * block pattern's blocks and try to find matches from the selected blocks.
 * Now this happens in the consumer to avoid heavy operations in the selector.
 *
 * @param {Object}   state        Editor state.
 * @param {Object[]} blocks       The selected blocks.
 * @param {?string}  rootClientId Optional root client ID of block list.
 *
 * @return {WPBlockPattern[]} Items that are eligible for a pattern transformation.
 */
const __experimentalGetPatternTransformItems = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createRegistrySelector)(select => (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, blocks, rootClientId = null) => {
  if (!blocks) {
    return selectors_EMPTY_ARRAY;
  }
  /**
   * For now we only handle blocks without InnerBlocks and take into account
   * the `__experimentalRole` property of blocks' attributes for the transformation.
   * Note that the blocks have been retrieved through `getBlock`, which doesn't
   * return the inner blocks of an inner block controller, so we still need
   * to check for this case too.
   */
  if (blocks.some(({
    clientId,
    innerBlocks
  }) => innerBlocks.length || areInnerBlocksControlled(state, clientId))) {
    return selectors_EMPTY_ARRAY;
  }

// Create a Set of the selected block names that is used in patterns filtering.
  const selectedBlockNames = Array.from(new Set(blocks.map(({
    name
  }) => name)));
  /**
   * Here we will return first set of possible eligible block patterns,
   * by checking the `blockTypes` property. We still have to recurse through
   * block pattern's blocks and try to find matches from the selected blocks.
   * Now this happens in the consumer to avoid heavy operations in the selector.
   */
  return select(STORE_NAME).getPatternsByBlockTypes(selectedBlockNames, rootClientId);
}, (state, blocks, rootClientId) => getAllowedPatternsDependants(select)(state, rootClientId)));

/**
 * Returns the Block List settings of a block, if any exist.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state    Editor state.
 * @param {?string} clientId Block client ID.
 *
 * @return {?Object} Block settings of the block if set.
 */
function getBlockListSettings(state, clientId) {
  return state.blockListSettings[clientId];
}

/**
 * Returns the editor settings.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {Object} The editor settings object.
 */
function getSettings(state) {
  return state.settings;
}

/**
 * Returns true if the most recent block change is be considered persistent, or
 * false otherwise. A persistent change is one committed by BlockEditorProvider
 * via its `onChange` callback, in addition to `onInput`.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Block editor state.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the most recent block change was persistent.
 */
function isLastBlockChangePersistent(state) {
  return state.blocks.isPersistentChange;
}

/**
 * Returns the block list settings for an array of blocks, if any exist.
 *
 * @param {Object} state     Editor state.
 * @param {Array}  clientIds Block client IDs.
 *
 * @return {Object} An object where the keys are client ids and the values are
 *                  a block list setting object.
 */
const __experimentalGetBlockListSettingsForBlocks = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, clientIds = []) => {
  return clientIds.reduce((blockListSettingsForBlocks, clientId) => {
    if (!state.blockListSettings[clientId]) {
      return blockListSettingsForBlocks;
    }
    return {
      ...blockListSettingsForBlocks,
      [clientId]: state.blockListSettings[clientId]
    };
  }, {});
}, state => [state.blockListSettings]);

/**
 * Returns the title of a given reusable block
 *
 * @param {Object}        state Global application state.
 * @param {number|string} ref   The shared block's ID.
 *
 * @return {string} The reusable block saved title.
 */
const __experimentalGetReusableBlockTitle = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createRegistrySelector)(select => (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, ref) => {
  external_wp_deprecated_default()("wp.data.select( 'core/block-editor' ).__experimentalGetReusableBlockTitle", {
    since: '6.6',
    version: '6.8'
  });
  const reusableBlock = unlock(select(STORE_NAME)).getReusableBlocks().find(block => block.id === ref);
  if (!reusableBlock) {
    return null;
  }
  return reusableBlock.title?.raw;
}, () => [unlock(select(STORE_NAME)).getReusableBlocks()]));

/**
 * Returns true if the most recent block change is be considered ignored, or
 * false otherwise. An ignored change is one not to be committed by
 * BlockEditorProvider, neither via `onChange` nor `onInput`.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Block editor state.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the most recent block change was ignored.
 */
function __unstableIsLastBlockChangeIgnored(state) {
  // TODO: Removal Plan: Changes incurred by RECEIVE_BLOCKS should not be
  // ignored if in-fact they result in a change in blocks state. The current
  // need to ignore changes not a result of user interaction should be
  // accounted for in the refactoring of reusable blocks as occurring within
  // their own separate block editor / state (#7119).
  return state.blocks.isIgnoredChange;
}

/**
 * Returns the block attributes changed as a result of the last dispatched
 * action.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Block editor state.
 *
 * @return {Object<string,Object>} Subsets of block attributes changed, keyed
 *                                 by block client ID.
 */
function __experimentalGetLastBlockAttributeChanges(state) {
  return state.lastBlockAttributesChange;
}

/**
 * Returns whether the navigation mode is enabled.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Is navigation mode enabled.
 */
function isNavigationMode(state) {
  return state.editorMode === 'navigation';
}

/**
 * Returns the current editor mode.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {string} the editor mode.
 */
function __unstableGetEditorMode(state) {
  return state.editorMode;
}

/**
 * Returns whether block moving mode is enabled.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Editor state.
 *
 * @return {string} Client Id of moving block.
 */
function selectors_hasBlockMovingClientId(state) {
  return state.hasBlockMovingClientId;
}

/**
 * Returns true if the last change was an automatic change, false otherwise.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the last change was automatic.
 */
function didAutomaticChange(state) {
  return !!state.automaticChangeStatus;
}

/**
 * Returns true if the current highlighted block matches the block clientId.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Global application state.
 * @param {string} clientId The block to check.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether the block is currently highlighted.
 */
function isBlockHighlighted(state, clientId) {
  return state.highlightedBlock === clientId;
}

/**
 * Checks if a given block has controlled inner blocks.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Global application state.
 * @param {string} clientId The block to check.
 *
 * @return {boolean} True if the block has controlled inner blocks.
 */
function areInnerBlocksControlled(state, clientId) {
  return !!state.blocks.controlledInnerBlocks[clientId];
}

/**
 * Returns the clientId for the first 'active' block of a given array of block names.
 * A block is 'active' if it (or a child) is the selected block.
 * Returns the first match moving up the DOM from the selected block.
 *
 * @param {Object}   state            Global application state.
 * @param {string[]} validBlocksNames The names of block types to check for.
 *
 * @return {string} The matching block's clientId.
 */
const __experimentalGetActiveBlockIdByBlockNames = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)((state, validBlockNames) => {
  if (!validBlockNames.length) {
    return null;
  }
  // Check if selected block is a valid entity area.
  const selectedBlockClientId = getSelectedBlockClientId(state);
  if (validBlockNames.includes(getBlockName(state, selectedBlockClientId))) {
    return selectedBlockClientId;
  }
  // Check if first selected block is a child of a valid entity area.
  const multiSelectedBlockClientIds = getMultiSelectedBlockClientIds(state);
  const entityAreaParents = getBlockParentsByBlockName(state, selectedBlockClientId || multiSelectedBlockClientIds[0], validBlockNames);
  if (entityAreaParents) {
    // Last parent closest/most interior.
    return entityAreaParents[entityAreaParents.length - 1];
  }
  return null;
}, (state, validBlockNames) => [state.selection.selectionStart.clientId, state.selection.selectionEnd.clientId, validBlockNames]);

/**
 * Tells if the block with the passed clientId was just inserted.
 *
 * @param {Object}  state    Global application state.
 * @param {Object}  clientId Client Id of the block.
 * @param {?string} source   Optional insertion source of the block.
 * @return {boolean} True if the block matches the last block inserted from the specified source.
 */
function wasBlockJustInserted(state, clientId, source) {
  const {
    lastBlockInserted
  } = state;
  return lastBlockInserted.clientIds?.includes(clientId) && lastBlockInserted.source === source;
}

/**
 * Tells if the block is visible on the canvas or not.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Global application state.
 * @param {Object} clientId Client Id of the block.
 * @return {boolean} True if the block is visible.
 */
function isBlockVisible(state, clientId) {
  var _state$blockVisibilit;
  return (_state$blockVisibilit = state.blockVisibility?.[clientId]) !== null && _state$blockVisibilit !== void 0 ? _state$blockVisibilit : true;
}

/**
 * Returns the list of all hidden blocks.
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 * @return {[string]} List of hidden blocks.
 */
const __unstableGetVisibleBlocks = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createSelector)(state => {
  const visibleBlocks = new Set(Object.keys(state.blockVisibility).filter(key => state.blockVisibility[key]));
  if (visibleBlocks.size === 0) {
    return EMPTY_SET;
  }
  return visibleBlocks;
}, state => [state.blockVisibility]);
function __unstableHasActiveBlockOverlayActive(state, clientId) {
  // Prevent overlay on blocks with a non-default editing mode. If the mdoe is
  // 'disabled' then the overlay is redundant since the block can't be
  // selected. If the mode is 'contentOnly' then the overlay is redundant
  // since there will be no controls to interact with once selected.
  if (getBlockEditingMode(state, clientId) !== 'default') {
    return false;
  }

// If the block editing is locked, the block overlay is always active.
  if (!canEditBlock(state, clientId)) {
    return true;
  }
  const editorMode = __unstableGetEditorMode(state);

// In zoom-out mode, the block overlay is always active for section level blocks.
  if (editorMode === 'zoom-out') {
    const {
      sectionRootClientId
    } = unlock(getSettings(state));
    if (sectionRootClientId) {
      const sectionClientIds = getBlockOrder(state, sectionRootClientId);
      if (sectionClientIds?.includes(clientId)) {
        return true;
      }
    } else if (clientId && !getBlockRootClientId(state, clientId)) {
      return true;
    }
  }

// In navigation mode, the block overlay is active when the block is not
  // selected (and doesn't contain a selected child). The same behavior is
  // also enabled in all modes for blocks that have controlled children
  // (reusable block, template part, navigation), unless explicitly disabled
  // with `supports.__experimentalDisableBlockOverlay`.
  const blockSupportDisable = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.hasBlockSupport)(getBlockName(state, clientId), '__experimentalDisableBlockOverlay', false);
  const shouldEnableIfUnselected = editorMode === 'navigation' || (blockSupportDisable ? false : areInnerBlocksControlled(state, clientId));
  return shouldEnableIfUnselected && !isBlockSelected(state, clientId) && !hasSelectedInnerBlock(state, clientId, true);
}
function __unstableIsWithinBlockOverlay(state, clientId) {
  let parent = state.blocks.parents.get(clientId);
  while (!!parent) {
    if (__unstableHasActiveBlockOverlayActive(state, parent)) {
      return true;
    }
    parent = state.blocks.parents.get(parent);
  }
  return false;
}

/**
 * @typedef {import('../components/block-editing-mode').BlockEditingMode} BlockEditingMode
 */

/**
 * Returns the block editing mode for a given block.
 *
 * The mode can be one of three options:
 *
 * - `'disabled'`: Prevents editing the block entirely, i.e. it cannot be
 *   selected.
 * - `'contentOnly'`: Hides all non-content UI, e.g. auxiliary controls in the
 *   toolbar, the block movers, block settings.
 * - `'default'`: Allows editing the block as normal.
 *
 * Blocks can set a mode using the `useBlockEditingMode` hook.
 *
 * The mode is inherited by all of the block's inner blocks, unless they have
 * their own mode.
 *
 * A template lock can also set a mode. If the template lock is `'contentOnly'`,
 * the block's mode is overridden to `'contentOnly'` if the block has a content
 * role attribute, or `'disabled'` otherwise.
 *
 * @see useBlockEditingMode
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Global application state.
 * @param {string} clientId The block client ID, or `''` for the root container.
 *
 * @return {BlockEditingMode} The block editing mode. One of `'disabled'`,
 *                            `'contentOnly'`, or `'default'`.
 */
const getBlockEditingMode = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createRegistrySelector)(select => (state, clientId = '') => {
  // Some selectors that call this provide `null` as the default
  // rootClientId, but the default rootClientId is actually `''`.
  if (clientId === null) {
    clientId = '';
  }
  // In zoom-out mode, override the behavior set by
  // __unstableSetBlockEditingMode to only allow editing the top-level
  // sections.
  const editorMode = __unstableGetEditorMode(state);
  if (editorMode === 'zoom-out') {
    const {
      sectionRootClientId
    } = unlock(getSettings(state));
    if (clientId === '' /* ROOT_CONTAINER_CLIENT_ID */) {
      return sectionRootClientId ? 'disabled' : 'contentOnly';
    }
    if (clientId === sectionRootClientId) {
      return 'contentOnly';
    }
    const sectionsClientIds = getBlockOrder(state, sectionRootClientId);
    if (!sectionsClientIds?.includes(clientId)) {
      return 'disabled';
    }
  }
  const blockEditingMode = state.blockEditingModes.get(clientId);
  if (blockEditingMode) {
    return blockEditingMode;
  }
  if (!clientId) {
    return 'default';
  }
  const rootClientId = getBlockRootClientId(state, clientId);
  const templateLock = getTemplateLock(state, rootClientId);
  if (templateLock === 'contentOnly') {
    const name = getBlockName(state, clientId);
    const isContent = select(external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.store).__experimentalHasContentRoleAttribute(name);
    return isContent ? 'contentOnly' : 'disabled';
  }
  const parentMode = getBlockEditingMode(state, rootClientId);
  return parentMode === 'contentOnly' ? 'default' : parentMode;
});

/**
 * Indicates if a block is ungroupable.
 * A block is ungroupable if it is a single grouping block with inner blocks.
 * If a block has an `ungroup` transform, it is also ungroupable, without the
 * requirement of being the default grouping block.
 * Additionally a block can only be ungrouped if it has inner blocks and can
 * be removed.
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Global application state.
 * @param {string} clientId Client Id of the block. If not passed the selected block's client id will be used.
 * @return {boolean} True if the block is ungroupable.
 */
const isUngroupable = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createRegistrySelector)(select => (state, clientId = '') => {
  const _clientId = clientId || getSelectedBlockClientId(state);
  if (!_clientId) {
    return false;
  }
  const {
    getGroupingBlockName
  } = select(external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.store);
  const block = getBlock(state, _clientId);
  const groupingBlockName = getGroupingBlockName();
  const _isUngroupable = block && (block.name === groupingBlockName || (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockType)(block.name)?.transforms?.ungroup) && !!block.innerBlocks.length;
  return _isUngroupable && canRemoveBlock(state, _clientId);
});

/**
 * Indicates if the provided blocks(by client ids) are groupable.
 * We need to have at least one block, have a grouping block name set and
 * be able to remove these blocks.
 *
 * @param {Object}   state     Global application state.
 * @param {string[]} clientIds Block client ids. If not passed the selected blocks client ids will be used.
 * @return {boolean} True if the blocks are groupable.
 */
const isGroupable = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createRegistrySelector)(select => (state, clientIds = selectors_EMPTY_ARRAY) => {
  const {
    getGroupingBlockName
  } = select(external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.store);
  const groupingBlockName = getGroupingBlockName();
  const _clientIds = clientIds?.length ? clientIds : getSelectedBlockClientIds(state);
  const rootClientId = _clientIds?.length ? getBlockRootClientId(state, _clientIds[0]) : undefined;
  const groupingBlockAvailable = canInsertBlockType(state, groupingBlockName, rootClientId);
  const _isGroupable = groupingBlockAvailable && _clientIds.length;
  return _isGroupable && canRemoveBlocks(state, _clientIds);
});

/**
 * DO-NOT-USE in production.
 * This selector is created for internal/experimental only usage and may be
 * removed anytime without any warning, causing breakage on any plugin or theme invoking it.
 *
 * @deprecated
 *
 * @param {Object} state    Global application state.
 * @param {Object} clientId Client Id of the block.
 *
 * @return {?string} Client ID of the ancestor block that is content locking the block.
 */
const __unstableGetContentLockingParent = (state, clientId) => {
  external_wp_deprecated_default()("wp.data.select( 'core/block-editor' ).__unstableGetContentLockingParent", {
    since: '6.1',
    version: '6.7'
  });
  return getContentLockingParent(state, clientId);
};

/**
 * DO-NOT-USE in production.
 * This selector is created for internal/experimental only usage and may be
 * removed anytime without any warning, causing breakage on any plugin or theme invoking it.
 *
 * @deprecated
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 */
function __unstableGetTemporarilyEditingAsBlocks(state) {
  external_wp_deprecated_default()("wp.data.select( 'core/block-editor' ).__unstableGetTemporarilyEditingAsBlocks", {
    since: '6.1',
    version: '6.7'
  });
  return getTemporarilyEditingAsBlocks(state);
}

/**
 * DO-NOT-USE in production.
 * This selector is created for internal/experimental only usage and may be
 * removed anytime without any warning, causing breakage on any plugin or theme invoking it.
 *
 * @deprecated
 *
 * @param {Object} state Global application state.
 */
function __unstableGetTemporarilyEditingFocusModeToRevert(state) {
  external_wp_deprecated_default()("wp.data.select( 'core/block-editor' ).__unstableGetTemporarilyEditingFocusModeToRevert", {
    since: '6.5',
    version: '6.7'
  });
  return getTemporarilyEditingFocusModeToRevert(state);
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/store/undo-ignore.js
// Keep track of the blocks that should not be pushing an additional
// undo stack when editing the entity.
// See the implementation of `syncDerivedUpdates` and `useBlockSync`.
const undoIgnoreBlocks = new WeakSet();

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/store/private-actions.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

const castArray = maybeArray => Array.isArray(maybeArray) ? maybeArray : [maybeArray];

/**
 * A list of private/experimental block editor settings that
 * should not become a part of the WordPress public API.
 * BlockEditorProvider will remove these settings from the
 * settings object it receives.
 *
 * @see https://github.com/WordPress/gutenberg/pull/46131
 */
const privateSettings = ['inserterMediaCategories', 'blockInspectorAnimation'];

/**
 * Action that updates the block editor settings and
 * conditionally preserves the experimental ones.
 *
 * @param {Object}  settings                          Updated settings
 * @param {Object}  options                           Options object.
 * @param {boolean} options.stripExperimentalSettings Whether to strip experimental settings.
 * @param {boolean} options.reset                     Whether to reset the settings.
 * @return {Object} Action object
 */
function __experimentalUpdateSettings(settings, {
  stripExperimentalSettings = false,
  reset = false
} = {}) {
  let cleanSettings = settings;
  // There are no plugins in the mobile apps, so there is no
  // need to strip the experimental settings:
  if (stripExperimentalSettings && external_wp_element_namespaceObject.Platform.OS === 'web') {
    cleanSettings = {};
    for (const key in settings) {
      if (!privateSettings.includes(key)) {
        cleanSettings[key] = settings[key];
      }
    }
  }
  return {
    type: 'UPDATE_SETTINGS',
    settings: cleanSettings,
    reset
  };
}

/**
 * Hides the block interface (eg. toolbar, outline, etc.)
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function hideBlockInterface() {
  return {
    type: 'HIDE_BLOCK_INTERFACE'
  };
}

/**
 * Shows the block interface (eg. toolbar, outline, etc.)
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function showBlockInterface() {
  return {
    type: 'SHOW_BLOCK_INTERFACE'
  };
}

/**
 * Yields action objects used in signalling that the blocks corresponding to
 * the set of specified client IDs are to be removed.
 *
 * Compared to `removeBlocks`, this private interface exposes an additional
 * parameter; see `forceRemove`.
 *
 * @param {string|string[]} clientIds      Client IDs of blocks to remove.
 * @param {boolean}         selectPrevious True if the previous block
 *                                         or the immediate parent
 *                                         (if no previous block exists)
 *                                         should be selected
 *                                         when a block is removed.
 * @param {boolean}         forceRemove    Whether to force the operation,
 *                                         bypassing any checks for certain
 *                                         block types.
 */
const privateRemoveBlocks = (clientIds, selectPrevious = true, forceRemove = false) => ({
  select,
  dispatch,
  registry
}) => {
  if (!clientIds || !clientIds.length) {
    return;
  }
  clientIds = castArray(clientIds);
  const canRemoveBlocks = select.canRemoveBlocks(clientIds);
  if (!canRemoveBlocks) {
    return;
  }

// In certain editing contexts, we'd like to prevent accidental removal
  // of important blocks. For example, in the site editor, the Query Loop
  // block is deemed important. In such cases, we'll ask the user for
  // confirmation that they intended to remove such block(s). However,
  // the editor instance is responsible for presenting those confirmation
  // prompts to the user. Any instance opting into removal prompts must
  // register using `setBlockRemovalRules()`.
  //
  // @see https://github.com/WordPress/gutenberg/pull/51145
  const rules = !forceRemove && select.getBlockRemovalRules();
  if (rules) {
    function flattenBlocks(blocks) {
      const result = [];
      const stack = [...blocks];
      while (stack.length) {
        const {
          innerBlocks,
          ...block
        } = stack.shift();
        stack.push(...innerBlocks);
        result.push(block);
      }
      return result;
    }
    const blockList = clientIds.map(select.getBlock);
    const flattenedBlocks = flattenBlocks(blockList);

// Find the first message and use it.
    let message;
    for (const rule of rules) {
      message = rule.callback(flattenedBlocks);
      if (message) {
        dispatch(displayBlockRemovalPrompt(clientIds, selectPrevious, message));
        return;
      }
    }
  }
  if (selectPrevious) {
    dispatch.selectPreviousBlock(clientIds[0], selectPrevious);
  }

// We're batching these two actions because an extra `undo/redo` step can
  // be created, based on whether we insert a default block or not.
  registry.batch(() => {
    dispatch({
      type: 'REMOVE_BLOCKS',
      clientIds
    });
    // To avoid a focus loss when removing the last block, assure there is
    // always a default block if the last of the blocks have been removed.
    dispatch(ensureDefaultBlock());
  });
};

/**
 * Action which will insert a default block insert action if there
 * are no other blocks at the root of the editor. This action should be used
 * in actions which may result in no blocks remaining in the editor (removal,
 * replacement, etc).
 */
const ensureDefaultBlock = () => ({
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  // To avoid a focus loss when removing the last block, assure there is
  // always a default block if the last of the blocks have been removed.
  const count = select.getBlockCount();
  if (count > 0) {
    return;
  }

// If there's an custom appender, don't insert default block.
  // We have to remember to manually move the focus elsewhere to
  // prevent it from being lost though.
  const {
    __unstableHasCustomAppender
  } = select.getSettings();
  if (__unstableHasCustomAppender) {
    return;
  }
  dispatch.insertDefaultBlock();
};

/**
 * Returns an action object used in signalling that a block removal prompt must
 * be displayed.
 *
 * Contrast with `setBlockRemovalRules`.
 *
 * @param {string|string[]} clientIds      Client IDs of blocks to remove.
 * @param {boolean}         selectPrevious True if the previous block or the
 *                                         immediate parent (if no previous
 *                                         block exists) should be selected
 *                                         when a block is removed.
 * @param {string}          message        Message to display in the prompt.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function displayBlockRemovalPrompt(clientIds, selectPrevious, message) {
  return {
    type: 'DISPLAY_BLOCK_REMOVAL_PROMPT',
    clientIds,
    selectPrevious,
    message
  };
}

/**
 * Returns an action object used in signalling that a block removal prompt must
 * be cleared, either be cause the user has confirmed or canceled the request
 * for removal.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function clearBlockRemovalPrompt() {
  return {
    type: 'CLEAR_BLOCK_REMOVAL_PROMPT'
  };
}

/**
 * Returns an action object used to set up any rules that a block editor may
 * provide in order to prevent a user from accidentally removing certain
 * blocks. These rules are then used to display a confirmation prompt to the
 * user. For instance, in the Site Editor, the Query Loop block is important
 * enough to warrant such confirmation.
 *
 * IMPORTANT: Registering rules implicitly signals to the `privateRemoveBlocks`
 * action that the editor will be responsible for displaying block removal
 * prompts and confirming deletions. This action is meant to be used by
 * component `BlockRemovalWarningModal` only.
 *
 * The data is a record whose keys are block types (e.g. 'core/query') and
 * whose values are the explanation to be shown to users (e.g. 'Query Loop
 * displays a list of posts or pages.').
 *
 * Contrast with `displayBlockRemovalPrompt`.
 *
 * @param {Record<string,string>|false} rules Block removal rules.
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function setBlockRemovalRules(rules = false) {
  return {
    type: 'SET_BLOCK_REMOVAL_RULES',
    rules
  };
}

/**
 * Sets the client ID of the block settings menu that is currently open.
 *
 * @param {?string} clientId The block client ID.
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function setOpenedBlockSettingsMenu(clientId) {
  return {
    type: 'SET_OPENED_BLOCK_SETTINGS_MENU',
    clientId
  };
}
function setStyleOverride(id, style) {
  return {
    type: 'SET_STYLE_OVERRIDE',
    id,
    style
  };
}
function deleteStyleOverride(id) {
  return {
    type: 'DELETE_STYLE_OVERRIDE',
    id
  };
}

/**
 * A higher-order action that mark every change inside a callback as "non-persistent"
 * and ignore pushing to the undo history stack. It's primarily used for synchronized
 * derived updates from the block editor without affecting the undo history.
 *
 * @param {() => void} callback The synchronous callback to derive updates.
 */
function syncDerivedUpdates(callback) {
  return ({
    dispatch,
    select,
    registry
  }) => {
    registry.batch(() => {
      // Mark every change in the `callback` as non-persistent.
      dispatch({
        type: 'SET_EXPLICIT_PERSISTENT',
        isPersistentChange: false
      });
      callback();
      dispatch({
        type: 'SET_EXPLICIT_PERSISTENT',
        isPersistentChange: undefined
      });

// Ignore pushing undo stack for the updated blocks.
      const updatedBlocks = select.getBlocks();
      undoIgnoreBlocks.add(updatedBlocks);
    });
  };
}

/**
 * Action that sets the element that had focus when focus leaves the editor canvas.
 *
 * @param {Object} lastFocus The last focused element.
 *
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function setLastFocus(lastFocus = null) {
  return {
    type: 'LAST_FOCUS',
    lastFocus
  };
}

/**
 * Action that stops temporarily editing as blocks.
 *
 * @param {string} clientId The block's clientId.
 */
function stopEditingAsBlocks(clientId) {
  return ({
    select,
    dispatch,
    registry
  }) => {
    const focusModeToRevert = unlock(registry.select(store)).getTemporarilyEditingFocusModeToRevert();
    dispatch.__unstableMarkNextChangeAsNotPersistent();
    dispatch.updateBlockAttributes(clientId, {
      templateLock: 'contentOnly'
    });
    dispatch.updateBlockListSettings(clientId, {
      ...select.getBlockListSettings(clientId),
      templateLock: 'contentOnly'
    });
    dispatch.updateSettings({
      focusMode: focusModeToRevert
    });
    dispatch.__unstableSetTemporarilyEditingAsBlocks();
  };
}

/**
 * Returns an action object used in signalling that the user has begun to drag.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function startDragging() {
  return {
    type: 'START_DRAGGING'
  };
}

/**
 * Returns an action object used in signalling that the user has stopped dragging.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function stopDragging() {
  return {
    type: 'STOP_DRAGGING'
  };
}

/**
 * @param {string|null} clientId The block's clientId, or `null` to clear.
 *
 * @return  {Object} Action object.
 */
function expandBlock(clientId) {
  return {
    type: 'SET_BLOCK_EXPANDED_IN_LIST_VIEW',
    clientId
  };
}

/**
 * Temporarily modify/unlock the content-only block for editions.
 *
 * @param {string} clientId The client id of the block.
 */
const modifyContentLockBlock = clientId => ({
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  dispatch.__unstableMarkNextChangeAsNotPersistent();
  dispatch.updateBlockAttributes(clientId, {
    templateLock: undefined
  });
  dispatch.updateBlockListSettings(clientId, {
    ...select.getBlockListSettings(clientId),
    templateLock: false
  });
  const focusModeToRevert = select.getSettings().focusMode;
  dispatch.updateSettings({
    focusMode: true
  });
  dispatch.__unstableSetTemporarilyEditingAsBlocks(clientId, focusModeToRevert);
};

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: external ["wp","a11y"]
const external_wp_a11y_namespaceObject = window["wp"]["a11y"];
;// CONCATENATED MODULE: external ["wp","notices"]
const external_wp_notices_namespaceObject = window["wp"]["notices"];
;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/utils/selection.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * A robust way to retain selection position through various
 * transforms is to insert a special character at the position and
 * then recover it.
 */
const START_OF_SELECTED_AREA = '\u0086';

/**
 * Retrieve the block attribute that contains the selection position.
 *
 * @param {Object} blockAttributes Block attributes.
 * @return {string|void} The name of the block attribute that was previously selected.
 */
function retrieveSelectedAttribute(blockAttributes) {
  if (!blockAttributes) {
    return;
  }
  return Object.keys(blockAttributes).find(name => {
    const value = blockAttributes[name];
    return (typeof value === 'string' || value instanceof external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.RichTextData) &&
    // To do: refactor this to use rich text's selection instead, so we
    // no longer have to use on this hack inserting a special character.
    value.toString().indexOf(START_OF_SELECTED_AREA) !== -1;
  });
}
function findRichTextAttributeKey(blockType) {
  for (const [key, value] of Object.entries(blockType.attributes)) {
    if (value.source === 'rich-text' || value.source === 'html') {
      return key;
    }
  }
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/store/actions.js
/* eslint no-console: [ 'error', { allow: [ 'error', 'warn' ] } ] */
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

/** @typedef {import('../components/use-on-block-drop/types').WPDropOperation} WPDropOperation */

const actions_castArray = maybeArray => Array.isArray(maybeArray) ? maybeArray : [maybeArray];

/**
 * Action that resets blocks state to the specified array of blocks, taking precedence
 * over any other content reflected as an edit in state.
 *
 * @param {Array} blocks Array of blocks.
 */
const resetBlocks = blocks => ({
  dispatch
}) => {
  dispatch({
    type: 'RESET_BLOCKS',
    blocks
  });
  dispatch(validateBlocksToTemplate(blocks));
};

/**
 * Block validity is a function of blocks state (at the point of a
 * reset) and the template setting. As a compromise to its placement
 * across distinct parts of state, it is implemented here as a side
 * effect of the block reset action.
 *
 * @param {Array} blocks Array of blocks.
 */
const validateBlocksToTemplate = blocks => ({
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  const template = select.getTemplate();
  const templateLock = select.getTemplateLock();

// Unlocked templates are considered always valid because they act
  // as default values only.
  const isBlocksValidToTemplate = !template || templateLock !== 'all' || (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.doBlocksMatchTemplate)(blocks, template);

// Update if validity has changed.
  const isValidTemplate = select.isValidTemplate();
  if (isBlocksValidToTemplate !== isValidTemplate) {
    dispatch.setTemplateValidity(isBlocksValidToTemplate);
    return isBlocksValidToTemplate;
  }
};

/**
 * A selection object.
 *
 * @typedef {Object} WPSelection
 *
 * @property {WPBlockSelection} start The selection start.
 * @property {WPBlockSelection} end   The selection end.
 */

/* eslint-disable jsdoc/valid-types */
/**
 * Returns an action object used in signalling that selection state should be
 * reset to the specified selection.
 *
 * @param {WPBlockSelection} selectionStart  The selection start.
 * @param {WPBlockSelection} selectionEnd    The selection end.
 * @param {0|-1|null}        initialPosition Initial block position.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function resetSelection(selectionStart, selectionEnd, initialPosition) {
  /* eslint-enable jsdoc/valid-types */
  return {
    type: 'RESET_SELECTION',
    selectionStart,
    selectionEnd,
    initialPosition
  };
}

/**
 * Returns an action object used in signalling that blocks have been received.
 * Unlike resetBlocks, these should be appended to the existing known set, not
 * replacing.
 *
 * @deprecated
 *
 * @param {Object[]} blocks Array of block objects.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function receiveBlocks(blocks) {
  external_wp_deprecated_default()('wp.data.dispatch( "core/block-editor" ).receiveBlocks', {
    since: '5.9',
    alternative: 'resetBlocks or insertBlocks'
  });
  return {
    type: 'RECEIVE_BLOCKS',
    blocks
  };
}

/**
 * Action that updates attributes of multiple blocks with the specified client IDs.
 *
 * @param {string|string[]} clientIds     Block client IDs.
 * @param {Object}          attributes    Block attributes to be merged. Should be keyed by clientIds if
 *                                        uniqueByBlock is true.
 * @param {boolean}         uniqueByBlock true if each block in clientIds array has a unique set of attributes
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function updateBlockAttributes(clientIds, attributes, uniqueByBlock = false) {
  return {
    type: 'UPDATE_BLOCK_ATTRIBUTES',
    clientIds: actions_castArray(clientIds),
    attributes,
    uniqueByBlock
  };
}

/**
 * Action that updates the block with the specified client ID.
 *
 * @param {string} clientId Block client ID.
 * @param {Object} updates  Block attributes to be merged.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function updateBlock(clientId, updates) {
  return {
    type: 'UPDATE_BLOCK',
    clientId,
    updates
  };
}

/* eslint-disable jsdoc/valid-types */
/**
 * Returns an action object used in signalling that the block with the
 * specified client ID has been selected, optionally accepting a position
 * value reflecting its selection directionality. An initialPosition of -1
 * reflects a reverse selection.
 *
 * @param {string}    clientId        Block client ID.
 * @param {0|-1|null} initialPosition Optional initial position. Pass as -1 to
 *                                    reflect reverse selection.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function selectBlock(clientId, initialPosition = 0) {
  /* eslint-enable jsdoc/valid-types */
  return {
    type: 'SELECT_BLOCK',
    initialPosition,
    clientId
  };
}

/**
 * Yields action objects used in signalling that the block preceding the given
 * clientId (or optionally, its first parent from bottom to top)
 * should be selected.
 *
 * @param {string}  clientId         Block client ID.
 * @param {boolean} fallbackToParent If true, select the first parent if there is no previous block.
 */
const selectPreviousBlock = (clientId, fallbackToParent = false) => ({
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  const previousBlockClientId = select.getPreviousBlockClientId(clientId);
  if (previousBlockClientId) {
    dispatch.selectBlock(previousBlockClientId, -1);
  } else if (fallbackToParent) {
    const firstParentClientId = select.getBlockRootClientId(clientId);
    if (firstParentClientId) {
      dispatch.selectBlock(firstParentClientId, -1);
    }
  }
};

/**
 * Yields action objects used in signalling that the block following the given
 * clientId should be selected.
 *
 * @param {string} clientId Block client ID.
 */
const selectNextBlock = clientId => ({
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  const nextBlockClientId = select.getNextBlockClientId(clientId);
  if (nextBlockClientId) {
    dispatch.selectBlock(nextBlockClientId);
  }
};

/**
 * Action that starts block multi-selection.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function startMultiSelect() {
  return {
    type: 'START_MULTI_SELECT'
  };
}

/**
 * Action that stops block multi-selection.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function stopMultiSelect() {
  return {
    type: 'STOP_MULTI_SELECT'
  };
}

/**
 * Action that changes block multi-selection.
 *
 * @param {string}      start                         First block of the multi selection.
 * @param {string}      end                           Last block of the multiselection.
 * @param {number|null} __experimentalInitialPosition Optional initial position. Pass as null to skip focus within editor canvas.
 */
const multiSelect = (start, end, __experimentalInitialPosition = 0) => ({
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  const startBlockRootClientId = select.getBlockRootClientId(start);
  const endBlockRootClientId = select.getBlockRootClientId(end);

// Only allow block multi-selections at the same level.
  if (startBlockRootClientId !== endBlockRootClientId) {
    return;
  }
  dispatch({
    type: 'MULTI_SELECT',
    start,
    end,
    initialPosition: __experimentalInitialPosition
  });
  const blockCount = select.getSelectedBlockCount();
  (0,external_wp_a11y_namespaceObject.speak)((0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.sprintf)( /* translators: %s: number of selected blocks */
  (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject._n)('%s block selected.', '%s blocks selected.', blockCount), blockCount), 'assertive');
};

/**
 * Action that clears the block selection.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function clearSelectedBlock() {
  return {
    type: 'CLEAR_SELECTED_BLOCK'
  };
}

/**
 * Action that enables or disables block selection.
 *
 * @param {boolean} [isSelectionEnabled=true] Whether block selection should
 *                                            be enabled.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function toggleSelection(isSelectionEnabled = true) {
  return {
    type: 'TOGGLE_SELECTION',
    isSelectionEnabled
  };
}

/* eslint-disable jsdoc/valid-types */
/**
 * Action that replaces given blocks with one or more replacement blocks.
 *
 * @param {(string|string[])} clientIds       Block client ID(s) to replace.
 * @param {(Object|Object[])} blocks          Replacement block(s).
 * @param {number}            indexToSelect   Index of replacement block to select.
 * @param {0|-1|null}         initialPosition Index of caret after in the selected block after the operation.
 * @param {?Object}           meta            Optional Meta values to be passed to the action object.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
const replaceBlocks = (clientIds, blocks, indexToSelect, initialPosition = 0, meta) => ({
  select,
  dispatch,
  registry
}) => {
  /* eslint-enable jsdoc/valid-types */
  clientIds = actions_castArray(clientIds);
  blocks = actions_castArray(blocks);
  const rootClientId = select.getBlockRootClientId(clientIds[0]);
  // Replace is valid if the new blocks can be inserted in the root block.
  for (let index = 0; index < blocks.length; index++) {
    const block = blocks[index];
    const canInsertBlock = select.canInsertBlockType(block.name, rootClientId);
    if (!canInsertBlock) {
      return;
    }
  }
  // We're batching these two actions because an extra `undo/redo` step can
  // be created, based on whether we insert a default block or not.
  registry.batch(() => {
    dispatch({
      type: 'REPLACE_BLOCKS',
      clientIds,
      blocks,
      time: Date.now(),
      indexToSelect,
      initialPosition,
      meta
    });
    // To avoid a focus loss when removing the last block, assure there is
    // always a default block if the last of the blocks have been removed.
    dispatch.ensureDefaultBlock();
  });
};

/**
 * Action that replaces a single block with one or more replacement blocks.
 *
 * @param {(string|string[])} clientId Block client ID to replace.
 * @param {(Object|Object[])} block    Replacement block(s).
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function replaceBlock(clientId, block) {
  return replaceBlocks(clientId, block);
}

/**
 * Higher-order action creator which, given the action type to dispatch creates
 * an action creator for managing block movement.
 *
 * @param {string} type Action type to dispatch.
 *
 * @return {Function} Action creator.
 */
const createOnMove = type => (clientIds, rootClientId) => ({
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  // If one of the blocks is locked or the parent is locked, we cannot move any block.
  const canMoveBlocks = select.canMoveBlocks(clientIds);
  if (!canMoveBlocks) {
    return;
  }
  dispatch({
    type,
    clientIds: actions_castArray(clientIds),
    rootClientId
  });
};
const moveBlocksDown = createOnMove('MOVE_BLOCKS_DOWN');
const moveBlocksUp = createOnMove('MOVE_BLOCKS_UP');

/**
 * Action that moves given blocks to a new position.
 *
 * @param {?string} clientIds        The client IDs of the blocks.
 * @param {?string} fromRootClientId Root client ID source.
 * @param {?string} toRootClientId   Root client ID destination.
 * @param {number}  index            The index to move the blocks to.
 */
const moveBlocksToPosition = (clientIds, fromRootClientId = '', toRootClientId = '', index) => ({
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  const canMoveBlocks = select.canMoveBlocks(clientIds);

// If one of the blocks is locked or the parent is locked, we cannot move any block.
  if (!canMoveBlocks) {
    return;
  }

// If moving inside the same root block the move is always possible.
  if (fromRootClientId !== toRootClientId) {
    const canRemoveBlocks = select.canRemoveBlocks(clientIds);

// If we're moving to another block, it means we're deleting blocks from
    // the original block, so we need to check if removing is possible.
    if (!canRemoveBlocks) {
      return;
    }
    const canInsertBlocks = select.canInsertBlocks(clientIds, toRootClientId);

// If moving to other parent block, the move is possible if we can insert a block of the same type inside the new parent block.
    if (!canInsertBlocks) {
      return;
    }
  }
  dispatch({
    type: 'MOVE_BLOCKS_TO_POSITION',
    fromRootClientId,
    toRootClientId,
    clientIds,
    index
  });
};

/**
 * Action that moves given block to a new position.
 *
 * @param {?string} clientId         The client ID of the block.
 * @param {?string} fromRootClientId Root client ID source.
 * @param {?string} toRootClientId   Root client ID destination.
 * @param {number}  index            The index to move the block to.
 */
function moveBlockToPosition(clientId, fromRootClientId = '', toRootClientId = '', index) {
  return moveBlocksToPosition([clientId], fromRootClientId, toRootClientId, index);
}

/**
 * Action that inserts a single block, optionally at a specific index respective a root block list.
 *
 * Only allowed blocks are inserted. The action may fail silently for blocks that are not allowed or if
 * a templateLock is active on the block list.
 *
 * @param {Object}   block           Block object to insert.
 * @param {?number}  index           Index at which block should be inserted.
 * @param {?string}  rootClientId    Optional root client ID of block list on which to insert.
 * @param {?boolean} updateSelection If true block selection will be updated. If false, block selection will not change. Defaults to true.
 * @param {?Object}  meta            Optional Meta values to be passed to the action object.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function insertBlock(block, index, rootClientId, updateSelection, meta) {
  return insertBlocks([block], index, rootClientId, updateSelection, 0, meta);
}

/* eslint-disable jsdoc/valid-types */
/**
 * Action that inserts an array of blocks, optionally at a specific index respective a root block list.
 *
 * Only allowed blocks are inserted. The action may fail silently for blocks that are not allowed or if
 * a templateLock is active on the block list.
 *
 * @param {Object[]}  blocks          Block objects to insert.
 * @param {?number}   index           Index at which block should be inserted.
 * @param {?string}   rootClientId    Optional root client ID of block list on which to insert.
 * @param {?boolean}  updateSelection If true block selection will be updated.  If false, block selection will not change. Defaults to true.
 * @param {0|-1|null} initialPosition Initial focus position. Setting it to null prevent focusing the inserted block.
 * @param {?Object}   meta            Optional Meta values to be passed to the action object.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
const insertBlocks = (blocks, index, rootClientId, updateSelection = true, initialPosition = 0, meta) => ({
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  /* eslint-enable jsdoc/valid-types */
  if (initialPosition !== null && typeof initialPosition === 'object') {
    meta = initialPosition;
    initialPosition = 0;
    external_wp_deprecated_default()("meta argument in wp.data.dispatch('core/block-editor')", {
      since: '5.8',
      hint: 'The meta argument is now the 6th argument of the function'
    });
  }
  blocks = actions_castArray(blocks);
  const allowedBlocks = [];
  for (const block of blocks) {
    const isValid = select.canInsertBlockType(block.name, rootClientId);
    if (isValid) {
      allowedBlocks.push(block);
    }
  }
  if (allowedBlocks.length) {
    dispatch({
      type: 'INSERT_BLOCKS',
      blocks: allowedBlocks,
      index,
      rootClientId,
      time: Date.now(),
      updateSelection,
      initialPosition: updateSelection ? initialPosition : null,
      meta
    });
  }
};

/**
 * Action that shows the insertion point.
 *
 * @param    {?string}         rootClientId           Optional root client ID of block list on
 *                                                    which to insert.
 * @param    {?number}         index                  Index at which block should be inserted.
 * @param    {?Object}         __unstableOptions      Additional options.
 * @property {boolean}         __unstableWithInserter Whether or not to show an inserter button.
 * @property {WPDropOperation} operation              The operation to perform when applied,
 *                                                    either 'insert' or 'replace' for now.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function showInsertionPoint(rootClientId, index, __unstableOptions = {}) {
  const {
    __unstableWithInserter,
    operation,
    nearestSide
  } = __unstableOptions;
  return {
    type: 'SHOW_INSERTION_POINT',
    rootClientId,
    index,
    __unstableWithInserter,
    operation,
    nearestSide
  };
}
/**
 * Action that hides the insertion point.
 */
const hideInsertionPoint = () => ({
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  if (!select.isBlockInsertionPointVisible()) {
    return;
  }
  dispatch({
    type: 'HIDE_INSERTION_POINT'
  });
};

/**
 * Action that resets the template validity.
 *
 * @param {boolean} isValid template validity flag.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function setTemplateValidity(isValid) {
  return {
    type: 'SET_TEMPLATE_VALIDITY',
    isValid
  };
}

/**
 * Action that synchronizes the template with the list of blocks.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
const synchronizeTemplate = () => ({
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  dispatch({
    type: 'SYNCHRONIZE_TEMPLATE'
  });
  const blocks = select.getBlocks();
  const template = select.getTemplate();
  const updatedBlockList = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.synchronizeBlocksWithTemplate)(blocks, template);
  dispatch.resetBlocks(updatedBlockList);
};

/**
 * Delete the current selection.
 *
 * @param {boolean} isForward
 */
const __unstableDeleteSelection = isForward => ({
  registry,
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  const selectionAnchor = select.getSelectionStart();
  const selectionFocus = select.getSelectionEnd();
  if (selectionAnchor.clientId === selectionFocus.clientId) {
    return;
  }

// It's not mergeable if there's no rich text selection.
  if (!selectionAnchor.attributeKey || !selectionFocus.attributeKey || typeof selectionAnchor.offset === 'undefined' || typeof selectionFocus.offset === 'undefined') {
    return false;
  }
  const anchorRootClientId = select.getBlockRootClientId(selectionAnchor.clientId);
  const focusRootClientId = select.getBlockRootClientId(selectionFocus.clientId);

// It's not mergeable if the selection doesn't start and end in the same
  // block list. Maybe in the future it should be allowed.
  if (anchorRootClientId !== focusRootClientId) {
    return;
  }
  const blockOrder = select.getBlockOrder(anchorRootClientId);
  const anchorIndex = blockOrder.indexOf(selectionAnchor.clientId);
  const focusIndex = blockOrder.indexOf(selectionFocus.clientId);

// Reassign selection start and end based on order.
  let selectionStart, selectionEnd;
  if (anchorIndex > focusIndex) {
    selectionStart = selectionFocus;
    selectionEnd = selectionAnchor;
  } else {
    selectionStart = selectionAnchor;
    selectionEnd = selectionFocus;
  }
  const targetSelection = isForward ? selectionEnd : selectionStart;
  const targetBlock = select.getBlock(targetSelection.clientId);
  const targetBlockType = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockType)(targetBlock.name);
  if (!targetBlockType.merge) {
    return;
  }
  const selectionA = selectionStart;
  const selectionB = selectionEnd;
  const blockA = select.getBlock(selectionA.clientId);
  const blockB = select.getBlock(selectionB.clientId);
  const htmlA = blockA.attributes[selectionA.attributeKey];
  const htmlB = blockB.attributes[selectionB.attributeKey];
  let valueA = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.create)({
    html: htmlA
  });
  let valueB = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.create)({
    html: htmlB
  });
  valueA = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.remove)(valueA, selectionA.offset, valueA.text.length);
  valueB = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.insert)(valueB, START_OF_SELECTED_AREA, 0, selectionB.offset);

// Clone the blocks so we don't manipulate the original.
  const cloneA = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.cloneBlock)(blockA, {
    [selectionA.attributeKey]: (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.toHTMLString)({
      value: valueA
    })
  });
  const cloneB = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.cloneBlock)(blockB, {
    [selectionB.attributeKey]: (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.toHTMLString)({
      value: valueB
    })
  });
  const followingBlock = isForward ? cloneA : cloneB;

// We can only merge blocks with similar types
  // thus, we transform the block to merge first
  const blocksWithTheSameType = blockA.name === blockB.name ? [followingBlock] : (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.switchToBlockType)(followingBlock, targetBlockType.name);

// If the block types can not match, do nothing
  if (!blocksWithTheSameType || !blocksWithTheSameType.length) {
    return;
  }
  let updatedAttributes;
  if (isForward) {
    const blockToMerge = blocksWithTheSameType.pop();
    updatedAttributes = targetBlockType.merge(blockToMerge.attributes, cloneB.attributes);
  } else {
    const blockToMerge = blocksWithTheSameType.shift();
    updatedAttributes = targetBlockType.merge(cloneA.attributes, blockToMerge.attributes);
  }
  const newAttributeKey = retrieveSelectedAttribute(updatedAttributes);
  const convertedHtml = updatedAttributes[newAttributeKey];
  const convertedValue = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.create)({
    html: convertedHtml
  });
  const newOffset = convertedValue.text.indexOf(START_OF_SELECTED_AREA);
  const newValue = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.remove)(convertedValue, newOffset, newOffset + 1);
  const newHtml = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.toHTMLString)({
    value: newValue
  });
  updatedAttributes[newAttributeKey] = newHtml;
  const selectedBlockClientIds = select.getSelectedBlockClientIds();
  const replacement = [...(isForward ? blocksWithTheSameType : []), {
    // Preserve the original client ID.
    ...targetBlock,
    attributes: {
      ...targetBlock.attributes,
      ...updatedAttributes
    }
  }, ...(isForward ? [] : blocksWithTheSameType)];
  registry.batch(() => {
    dispatch.selectionChange(targetBlock.clientId, newAttributeKey, newOffset, newOffset);
    dispatch.replaceBlocks(selectedBlockClientIds, replacement, 0,
    // If we don't pass the `indexToSelect` it will default to the last block.
    select.getSelectedBlocksInitialCaretPosition());
  });
};

/**
 * Split the current selection.
 * @param {?Array} blocks
 */
const __unstableSplitSelection = (blocks = []) => ({
  registry,
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  const selectionAnchor = select.getSelectionStart();
  const selectionFocus = select.getSelectionEnd();
  const anchorRootClientId = select.getBlockRootClientId(selectionAnchor.clientId);
  const focusRootClientId = select.getBlockRootClientId(selectionFocus.clientId);

// It's not splittable if the selection doesn't start and end in the same
  // block list. Maybe in the future it should be allowed.
  if (anchorRootClientId !== focusRootClientId) {
    return;
  }
  const blockOrder = select.getBlockOrder(anchorRootClientId);
  const anchorIndex = blockOrder.indexOf(selectionAnchor.clientId);
  const focusIndex = blockOrder.indexOf(selectionFocus.clientId);

// Reassign selection start and end based on order.
  let selectionStart, selectionEnd;
  if (anchorIndex > focusIndex) {
    selectionStart = selectionFocus;
    selectionEnd = selectionAnchor;
  } else {
    selectionStart = selectionAnchor;
    selectionEnd = selectionFocus;
  }
  const selectionA = selectionStart;
  const selectionB = selectionEnd;
  const blockA = select.getBlock(selectionA.clientId);
  const blockB = select.getBlock(selectionB.clientId);
  const blockAType = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockType)(blockA.name);
  const blockBType = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockType)(blockB.name);
  const attributeKeyA = typeof selectionA.attributeKey === 'string' ? selectionA.attributeKey : findRichTextAttributeKey(blockAType);
  const attributeKeyB = typeof selectionB.attributeKey === 'string' ? selectionB.attributeKey : findRichTextAttributeKey(blockBType);
  const blockAttributes = select.getBlockAttributes(selectionA.clientId);
  const bindings = blockAttributes?.metadata?.bindings;

// If the attribute is bound, don't split the selection and insert a new block instead.
  if (bindings?.[attributeKeyA]) {
    // Show warning if user tries to insert a block into another block with bindings.
    if (blocks.length) {
      const {
        createWarningNotice
      } = registry.dispatch(external_wp_notices_namespaceObject.store);
      createWarningNotice((0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)("Blocks can't be inserted into other blocks with bindings"), {
        type: 'snackbar'
      });
      return;
    }
    dispatch.insertAfterBlock(selectionA.clientId);
    return;
  }

// Can't split if the selection is not set.
  if (!attributeKeyA || !attributeKeyB || typeof selectionAnchor.offset === 'undefined' || typeof selectionFocus.offset === 'undefined') {
    return;
  }

// We can do some short-circuiting if the selection is collapsed.
  if (selectionA.clientId === selectionB.clientId && attributeKeyA === attributeKeyB && selectionA.offset === selectionB.offset) {
    // If an unmodified default block is selected, replace it. We don't
    // want to be converting into a default block.
    if (blocks.length) {
      if ((0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.isUnmodifiedDefaultBlock)(blockA)) {
        dispatch.replaceBlocks([selectionA.clientId], blocks, blocks.length - 1, -1);
        return;
      }
    }

// If selection is at the start or end, we can simply insert an
    // empty block, provided this block has no inner blocks.
    else if (!select.getBlockOrder(selectionA.clientId).length) {
      function createEmpty() {
        const defaultBlockName = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getDefaultBlockName)();
        return select.canInsertBlockType(defaultBlockName, anchorRootClientId) ? (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.createBlock)(defaultBlockName) : (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.createBlock)(select.getBlockName(selectionA.clientId));
      }
      const length = blockAttributes[attributeKeyA].length;
      if (selectionA.offset === 0 && length) {
        dispatch.insertBlocks([createEmpty()], select.getBlockIndex(selectionA.clientId), anchorRootClientId, false);
        return;
      }
      if (selectionA.offset === length) {
        dispatch.insertBlocks([createEmpty()], select.getBlockIndex(selectionA.clientId) + 1, anchorRootClientId);
        return;
      }
    }
  }
  const htmlA = blockA.attributes[attributeKeyA];
  const htmlB = blockB.attributes[attributeKeyB];
  let valueA = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.create)({
    html: htmlA
  });
  let valueB = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.create)({
    html: htmlB
  });
  valueA = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.remove)(valueA, selectionA.offset, valueA.text.length);
  valueB = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.remove)(valueB, 0, selectionB.offset);
  let head = {
    // Preserve the original client ID.
    ...blockA,
    // If both start and end are the same, should only copy innerBlocks
    // once.
    innerBlocks: blockA.clientId === blockB.clientId ? [] : blockA.innerBlocks,
    attributes: {
      ...blockA.attributes,
      [attributeKeyA]: (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.toHTMLString)({
        value: valueA
      })
    }
  };
  let tail = {
    ...blockB,
    // Only preserve the original client ID if the end is different.
    clientId: blockA.clientId === blockB.clientId ? (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.createBlock)(blockB.name).clientId : blockB.clientId,
    attributes: {
      ...blockB.attributes,
      [attributeKeyB]: (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.toHTMLString)({
        value: valueB
      })
    }
  };

// When splitting a block, attempt to convert the tail block to the
  // default block type. For example, when splitting a heading block, the
  // tail block will be converted to a paragraph block. Note that for
  // blocks such as a list item and button, this will be skipped because
  // the default block type cannot be inserted.
  const defaultBlockName = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getDefaultBlockName)();
  if (
  // A block is only split when the selection is within the same
  // block.
  blockA.clientId === blockB.clientId && defaultBlockName && tail.name !== defaultBlockName && select.canInsertBlockType(defaultBlockName, anchorRootClientId)) {
    const switched = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.switchToBlockType)(tail, defaultBlockName);
    if (switched?.length === 1) {
      tail = switched[0];
    }
  }
  if (!blocks.length) {
    dispatch.replaceBlocks(select.getSelectedBlockClientIds(), [head, tail]);
    return;
  }
  let selection;
  const output = [];
  const clonedBlocks = [...blocks];
  const firstBlock = clonedBlocks.shift();
  const headType = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockType)(head.name);
  const firstBlocks = headType.merge && firstBlock.name === headType.name ? [firstBlock] : (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.switchToBlockType)(firstBlock, headType.name);
  if (firstBlocks?.length) {
    const first = firstBlocks.shift();
    head = {
      ...head,
      attributes: {
        ...head.attributes,
        ...headType.merge(head.attributes, first.attributes)
      }
    };
    output.push(head);
    selection = {
      clientId: head.clientId,
      attributeKey: attributeKeyA,
      offset: (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.create)({
        html: head.attributes[attributeKeyA]
      }).text.length
    };
    clonedBlocks.unshift(...firstBlocks);
  } else {
    if (!(0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.isUnmodifiedBlock)(head)) {
      output.push(head);
    }
    output.push(firstBlock);
  }
  const lastBlock = clonedBlocks.pop();
  const tailType = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockType)(tail.name);
  if (clonedBlocks.length) {
    output.push(...clonedBlocks);
  }
  if (lastBlock) {
    const lastBlocks = tailType.merge && tailType.name === lastBlock.name ? [lastBlock] : (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.switchToBlockType)(lastBlock, tailType.name);
    if (lastBlocks?.length) {
      const last = lastBlocks.pop();
      output.push({
        ...tail,
        attributes: {
          ...tail.attributes,
          ...tailType.merge(last.attributes, tail.attributes)
        }
      });
      output.push(...lastBlocks);
      selection = {
        clientId: tail.clientId,
        attributeKey: attributeKeyB,
        offset: (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.create)({
          html: last.attributes[attributeKeyB]
        }).text.length
      };
    } else {
      output.push(lastBlock);
      if (!(0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.isUnmodifiedBlock)(tail)) {
        output.push(tail);
      }
    }
  } else if (!(0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.isUnmodifiedBlock)(tail)) {
    output.push(tail);
  }
  registry.batch(() => {
    dispatch.replaceBlocks(select.getSelectedBlockClientIds(), output, output.length - 1, 0);
    if (selection) {
      dispatch.selectionChange(selection.clientId, selection.attributeKey, selection.offset, selection.offset);
    }
  });
};

/**
 * Expand the selection to cover the entire blocks, removing partial selection.
 */
const __unstableExpandSelection = () => ({
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  const selectionAnchor = select.getSelectionStart();
  const selectionFocus = select.getSelectionEnd();
  dispatch.selectionChange({
    start: {
      clientId: selectionAnchor.clientId
    },
    end: {
      clientId: selectionFocus.clientId
    }
  });
};

/**
 * Action that merges two blocks.
 *
 * @param {string} firstBlockClientId  Client ID of the first block to merge.
 * @param {string} secondBlockClientId Client ID of the second block to merge.
 */
const mergeBlocks = (firstBlockClientId, secondBlockClientId) => ({
  registry,
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  const clientIdA = firstBlockClientId;
  const clientIdB = secondBlockClientId;
  const blockA = select.getBlock(clientIdA);
  const blockAType = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockType)(blockA.name);
  if (!blockAType) {
    return;
  }
  const blockB = select.getBlock(clientIdB);
  if (!blockAType.merge && (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockSupport)(blockA.name, '__experimentalOnMerge')) {
    // If there's no merge function defined, attempt merging inner
    // blocks.
    const blocksWithTheSameType = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.switchToBlockType)(blockB, blockAType.name);
    // Only focus the previous block if it's not mergeable.
    if (blocksWithTheSameType?.length !== 1) {
      dispatch.selectBlock(blockA.clientId);
      return;
    }
    const [blockWithSameType] = blocksWithTheSameType;
    if (blockWithSameType.innerBlocks.length < 1) {
      dispatch.selectBlock(blockA.clientId);
      return;
    }
    registry.batch(() => {
      dispatch.insertBlocks(blockWithSameType.innerBlocks, undefined, clientIdA);
      dispatch.removeBlock(clientIdB);
      dispatch.selectBlock(blockWithSameType.innerBlocks[0].clientId);

// Attempt to merge the next block if it's the same type and
      // same attributes. This is useful when merging a paragraph into
      // a list, and the next block is also a list. If we don't merge,
      // it looks like one list, but it's actually two lists. The same
      // applies to other blocks such as a group with the same
      // attributes.
      const nextBlockClientId = select.getNextBlockClientId(clientIdA);
      if (nextBlockClientId && select.getBlockName(clientIdA) === select.getBlockName(nextBlockClientId)) {
        const rootAttributes = select.getBlockAttributes(clientIdA);
        const previousRootAttributes = select.getBlockAttributes(nextBlockClientId);
        if (Object.keys(rootAttributes).every(key => rootAttributes[key] === previousRootAttributes[key])) {
          dispatch.moveBlocksToPosition(select.getBlockOrder(nextBlockClientId), nextBlockClientId, clientIdA);
          dispatch.removeBlock(nextBlockClientId, false);
        }
      }
    });
    return;
  }
  if ((0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.isUnmodifiedDefaultBlock)(blockA)) {
    dispatch.removeBlock(clientIdA, select.isBlockSelected(clientIdA));
    return;
  }
  if ((0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.isUnmodifiedDefaultBlock)(blockB)) {
    dispatch.removeBlock(clientIdB, select.isBlockSelected(clientIdB));
    return;
  }
  if (!blockAType.merge) {
    dispatch.selectBlock(blockA.clientId);
    return;
  }
  const blockBType = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockType)(blockB.name);
  const {
    clientId,
    attributeKey,
    offset
  } = select.getSelectionStart();
  const selectedBlockType = clientId === clientIdA ? blockAType : blockBType;
  const attributeDefinition = selectedBlockType.attributes[attributeKey];
  const canRestoreTextSelection = (clientId === clientIdA || clientId === clientIdB) && attributeKey !== undefined && offset !== undefined &&
  // We cannot restore text selection if the RichText identifier
  // is not a defined block attribute key. This can be the case if the
  // fallback intance ID is used to store selection (and no RichText
  // identifier is set), or when the identifier is wrong.
  !!attributeDefinition;
  if (!attributeDefinition) {
    if (typeof attributeKey === 'number') {
      window.console.error(`RichText needs an identifier prop that is the block attribute key of the attribute it controls. Its type is expected to be a string, but was ${typeof attributeKey}`);
    } else {
      window.console.error('The RichText identifier prop does not match any attributes defined by the block.');
    }
  }

// Clone the blocks so we don't insert the character in a "live" block.
  const cloneA = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.cloneBlock)(blockA);
  const cloneB = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.cloneBlock)(blockB);
  if (canRestoreTextSelection) {
    const selectedBlock = clientId === clientIdA ? cloneA : cloneB;
    const html = selectedBlock.attributes[attributeKey];
    const value = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.insert)((0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.create)({
      html
    }), START_OF_SELECTED_AREA, offset, offset);
    selectedBlock.attributes[attributeKey] = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.toHTMLString)({
      value
    });
  }

// We can only merge blocks with similar types
  // thus, we transform the block to merge first.
  const blocksWithTheSameType = blockA.name === blockB.name ? [cloneB] : (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.switchToBlockType)(cloneB, blockA.name);

// If the block types can not match, do nothing.
  if (!blocksWithTheSameType || !blocksWithTheSameType.length) {
    return;
  }

// Calling the merge to update the attributes and remove the block to be merged.
  const updatedAttributes = blockAType.merge(cloneA.attributes, blocksWithTheSameType[0].attributes);
  if (canRestoreTextSelection) {
    const newAttributeKey = retrieveSelectedAttribute(updatedAttributes);
    const convertedHtml = updatedAttributes[newAttributeKey];
    const convertedValue = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.create)({
      html: convertedHtml
    });
    const newOffset = convertedValue.text.indexOf(START_OF_SELECTED_AREA);
    const newValue = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.remove)(convertedValue, newOffset, newOffset + 1);
    const newHtml = (0,external_wp_richText_namespaceObject.toHTMLString)({
      value: newValue
    });
    updatedAttributes[newAttributeKey] = newHtml;
    dispatch.selectionChange(blockA.clientId, newAttributeKey, newOffset, newOffset);
  }
  dispatch.replaceBlocks([blockA.clientId, blockB.clientId], [{
    ...blockA,
    attributes: {
      ...blockA.attributes,
      ...updatedAttributes
    }
  }, ...blocksWithTheSameType.slice(1)], 0 // If we don't pass the `indexToSelect` it will default to the last block.
  );
};

/**
 * Yields action objects used in signalling that the blocks corresponding to
 * the set of specified client IDs are to be removed.
 *
 * @param {string|string[]} clientIds      Client IDs of blocks to remove.
 * @param {boolean}         selectPrevious True if the previous block
 *                                         or the immediate parent
 *                                         (if no previous block exists)
 *                                         should be selected
 *                                         when a block is removed.
 */
const removeBlocks = (clientIds, selectPrevious = true) => privateRemoveBlocks(clientIds, selectPrevious);

/**
 * Returns an action object used in signalling that the block with the
 * specified client ID is to be removed.
 *
 * @param {string}  clientId       Client ID of block to remove.
 * @param {boolean} selectPrevious True if the previous block should be
 *                                 selected when a block is removed.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function removeBlock(clientId, selectPrevious) {
  return removeBlocks([clientId], selectPrevious);
}

/* eslint-disable jsdoc/valid-types */
/**
 * Returns an action object used in signalling that the inner blocks with the
 * specified client ID should be replaced.
 *
 * @param {string}    rootClientId    Client ID of the block whose InnerBlocks will re replaced.
 * @param {Object[]}  blocks          Block objects to insert as new InnerBlocks
 * @param {?boolean}  updateSelection If true block selection will be updated. If false, block selection will not change. Defaults to false.
 * @param {0|-1|null} initialPosition Initial block position.
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function replaceInnerBlocks(rootClientId, blocks, updateSelection = false, initialPosition = 0) {
  /* eslint-enable jsdoc/valid-types */
  return {
    type: 'REPLACE_INNER_BLOCKS',
    rootClientId,
    blocks,
    updateSelection,
    initialPosition: updateSelection ? initialPosition : null,
    time: Date.now()
  };
}

/**
 * Returns an action object used to toggle the block editing mode between
 * visual and HTML modes.
 *
 * @param {string} clientId Block client ID.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function toggleBlockMode(clientId) {
  return {
    type: 'TOGGLE_BLOCK_MODE',
    clientId
  };
}

/**
 * Returns an action object used in signalling that the user has begun to type.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function startTyping() {
  return {
    type: 'START_TYPING'
  };
}

/**
 * Returns an action object used in signalling that the user has stopped typing.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function stopTyping() {
  return {
    type: 'STOP_TYPING'
  };
}

/**
 * Returns an action object used in signalling that the user has begun to drag blocks.
 *
 * @param {string[]} clientIds An array of client ids being dragged
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function startDraggingBlocks(clientIds = []) {
  return {
    type: 'START_DRAGGING_BLOCKS',
    clientIds
  };
}

/**
 * Returns an action object used in signalling that the user has stopped dragging blocks.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function stopDraggingBlocks() {
  return {
    type: 'STOP_DRAGGING_BLOCKS'
  };
}

/**
 * Returns an action object used in signalling that the caret has entered formatted text.
 *
 * @deprecated
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function enterFormattedText() {
  external_wp_deprecated_default()('wp.data.dispatch( "core/block-editor" ).enterFormattedText', {
    since: '6.1',
    version: '6.3'
  });
  return {
    type: 'DO_NOTHING'
  };
}

/**
 * Returns an action object used in signalling that the user caret has exited formatted text.
 *
 * @deprecated
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function exitFormattedText() {
  external_wp_deprecated_default()('wp.data.dispatch( "core/block-editor" ).exitFormattedText', {
    since: '6.1',
    version: '6.3'
  });
  return {
    type: 'DO_NOTHING'
  };
}

/**
 * Action that changes the position of the user caret.
 *
 * @param {string|WPSelection} clientId     The selected block client ID.
 * @param {string}             attributeKey The selected block attribute key.
 * @param {number}             startOffset  The start offset.
 * @param {number}             endOffset    The end offset.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function selectionChange(clientId, attributeKey, startOffset, endOffset) {
  if (typeof clientId === 'string') {
    return {
      type: 'SELECTION_CHANGE',
      clientId,
      attributeKey,
      startOffset,
      endOffset
    };
  }
  return {
    type: 'SELECTION_CHANGE',
    ...clientId
  };
}

/**
 * Action that adds a new block of the default type to the block list.
 *
 * @param {?Object} attributes   Optional attributes of the block to assign.
 * @param {?string} rootClientId Optional root client ID of block list on which
 *                               to append.
 * @param {?number} index        Optional index where to insert the default block.
 */
const insertDefaultBlock = (attributes, rootClientId, index) => ({
  dispatch
}) => {
  // Abort if there is no default block type (if it has been unregistered).
  const defaultBlockName = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getDefaultBlockName)();
  if (!defaultBlockName) {
    return;
  }
  const block = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.createBlock)(defaultBlockName, attributes);
  return dispatch.insertBlock(block, index, rootClientId);
};

/**
 * @typedef {Object< string, Object >} SettingsByClientId
 */

/**
 * Action that changes the nested settings of the given block(s).
 *
 * @param {string | SettingsByClientId} clientId Client ID of the block whose
 *                                               nested setting are being
 *                                               received, or object of settings
 *                                               by client ID.
 * @param {Object}                      settings Object with the new settings
 *                                               for the nested block.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object
 */
function updateBlockListSettings(clientId, settings) {
  return {
    type: 'UPDATE_BLOCK_LIST_SETTINGS',
    clientId,
    settings
  };
}

/**
 * Action that updates the block editor settings.
 *
 * @param {Object} settings Updated settings
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object
 */
function updateSettings(settings) {
  return __experimentalUpdateSettings(settings, {
    stripExperimentalSettings: true
  });
}

/**
 * Action that signals that a temporary reusable block has been saved
 * in order to switch its temporary id with the real id.
 *
 * @param {string} id        Reusable block's id.
 * @param {string} updatedId Updated block's id.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function __unstableSaveReusableBlock(id, updatedId) {
  return {
    type: 'SAVE_REUSABLE_BLOCK_SUCCESS',
    id,
    updatedId
  };
}

/**
 * Action that marks the last block change explicitly as persistent.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function __unstableMarkLastChangeAsPersistent() {
  return {
    type: 'MARK_LAST_CHANGE_AS_PERSISTENT'
  };
}

/**
 * Action that signals that the next block change should be marked explicitly as not persistent.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function __unstableMarkNextChangeAsNotPersistent() {
  return {
    type: 'MARK_NEXT_CHANGE_AS_NOT_PERSISTENT'
  };
}

/**
 * Action that marks the last block change as an automatic change, meaning it was not
 * performed by the user, and can be undone using the `Escape` and `Backspace` keys.
 * This action must be called after the change was made, and any actions that are a
 * consequence of it, so it is recommended to be called at the next idle period to ensure all
 * selection changes have been recorded.
 */
const __unstableMarkAutomaticChange = () => ({
  dispatch
}) => {
  dispatch({
    type: 'MARK_AUTOMATIC_CHANGE'
  });
  const {
    requestIdleCallback = cb => setTimeout(cb, 100)
  } = window;
  requestIdleCallback(() => {
    dispatch({
      type: 'MARK_AUTOMATIC_CHANGE_FINAL'
    });
  });
};

/**
 * Action that enables or disables the navigation mode.
 *
 * @param {boolean} isNavigationMode Enable/Disable navigation mode.
 */
const setNavigationMode = (isNavigationMode = true) => ({
  dispatch
}) => {
  dispatch.__unstableSetEditorMode(isNavigationMode ? 'navigation' : 'edit');
};

/**
 * Action that sets the editor mode
 *
 * @param {string} mode Editor mode
 */
const __unstableSetEditorMode = mode => ({
  dispatch,
  select,
  registry
}) => {
  // When switching to zoom-out mode, we need to select the parent section
  if (mode === 'zoom-out') {
    const firstSelectedClientId = select.getBlockSelectionStart();
    const {
      sectionRootClientId
    } = unlock(registry.select(STORE_NAME).getSettings());
    if (firstSelectedClientId) {
      let sectionClientId;
      if (sectionRootClientId) {
        const sectionClientIds = select.getBlockOrder(sectionRootClientId);
        sectionClientId = select.getBlockParents(firstSelectedClientId).find(parent => sectionClientIds.includes(parent));
      } else {
        sectionClientId = select.getBlockHierarchyRootClientId(firstSelectedClientId);
      }
      if (sectionClientId) {
        dispatch.selectBlock(sectionClientId);
      } else {
        dispatch.clearSelectedBlock();
      }
    }
  }
  dispatch({
    type: 'SET_EDITOR_MODE',
    mode
  });
  if (mode === 'navigation') {
    (0,external_wp_a11y_namespaceObject.speak)((0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('You are currently in navigation mode. Navigate blocks using the Tab key and Arrow keys. Use Left and Right Arrow keys to move between nesting levels. To exit navigation mode and edit the selected block, press Enter.'));
  } else if (mode === 'edit') {
    (0,external_wp_a11y_namespaceObject.speak)((0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('You are currently in edit mode. To return to the navigation mode, press Escape.'));
  } else if (mode === 'zoom-out') {
    (0,external_wp_a11y_namespaceObject.speak)((0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('You are currently in zoom-out mode.'));
  }
};

/**
 * Action that enables or disables the block moving mode.
 *
 * @param {string|null} hasBlockMovingClientId Enable/Disable block moving mode.
 */
const setBlockMovingClientId = (hasBlockMovingClientId = null) => ({
  dispatch
}) => {
  dispatch({
    type: 'SET_BLOCK_MOVING_MODE',
    hasBlockMovingClientId
  });
  if (hasBlockMovingClientId) {
    (0,external_wp_a11y_namespaceObject.speak)((0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Use the Tab key and Arrow keys to choose new block location. Use Left and Right Arrow keys to move between nesting levels. Once location is selected press Enter or Space to move the block.'));
  }
};

/**
 * Action that duplicates a list of blocks.
 *
 * @param {string[]} clientIds
 * @param {boolean}  updateSelection
 */
const duplicateBlocks = (clientIds, updateSelection = true) => ({
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  if (!clientIds || !clientIds.length) {
    return;
  }

// Return early if blocks don't exist.
  const blocks = select.getBlocksByClientId(clientIds);
  if (blocks.some(block => !block)) {
    return;
  }

// Return early if blocks don't support multiple usage.
  const blockNames = blocks.map(block => block.name);
  if (blockNames.some(blockName => !(0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.hasBlockSupport)(blockName, 'multiple', true))) {
    return;
  }
  const rootClientId = select.getBlockRootClientId(clientIds[0]);
  const clientIdsArray = actions_castArray(clientIds);
  const lastSelectedIndex = select.getBlockIndex(clientIdsArray[clientIdsArray.length - 1]);
  const clonedBlocks = blocks.map(block => (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.__experimentalCloneSanitizedBlock)(block));
  dispatch.insertBlocks(clonedBlocks, lastSelectedIndex + 1, rootClientId, updateSelection);
  if (clonedBlocks.length > 1 && updateSelection) {
    dispatch.multiSelect(clonedBlocks[0].clientId, clonedBlocks[clonedBlocks.length - 1].clientId);
  }
  return clonedBlocks.map(block => block.clientId);
};

/**
 * Action that inserts a default block before a given block.
 *
 * @param {string} clientId
 */
const insertBeforeBlock = clientId => ({
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  if (!clientId) {
    return;
  }
  const rootClientId = select.getBlockRootClientId(clientId);
  const isLocked = select.getTemplateLock(rootClientId);
  if (isLocked) {
    return;
  }
  const blockIndex = select.getBlockIndex(clientId);
  const directInsertBlock = rootClientId ? select.getDirectInsertBlock(rootClientId) : null;
  if (!directInsertBlock) {
    return dispatch.insertDefaultBlock({}, rootClientId, blockIndex);
  }
  const copiedAttributes = {};
  if (directInsertBlock.attributesToCopy) {
    const attributes = select.getBlockAttributes(clientId);
    directInsertBlock.attributesToCopy.forEach(key => {
      if (attributes[key]) {
        copiedAttributes[key] = attributes[key];
      }
    });
  }
  const block = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.createBlock)(directInsertBlock.name, {
    ...directInsertBlock.attributes,
    ...copiedAttributes
  });
  return dispatch.insertBlock(block, blockIndex, rootClientId);
};

/**
 * Action that inserts a default block after a given block.
 *
 * @param {string} clientId
 */
const insertAfterBlock = clientId => ({
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  if (!clientId) {
    return;
  }
  const rootClientId = select.getBlockRootClientId(clientId);
  const isLocked = select.getTemplateLock(rootClientId);
  if (isLocked) {
    return;
  }
  const blockIndex = select.getBlockIndex(clientId);
  const directInsertBlock = rootClientId ? select.getDirectInsertBlock(rootClientId) : null;
  if (!directInsertBlock) {
    return dispatch.insertDefaultBlock({}, rootClientId, blockIndex + 1);
  }
  const copiedAttributes = {};
  if (directInsertBlock.attributesToCopy) {
    const attributes = select.getBlockAttributes(clientId);
    directInsertBlock.attributesToCopy.forEach(key => {
      if (attributes[key]) {
        copiedAttributes[key] = attributes[key];
      }
    });
  }
  const block = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.createBlock)(directInsertBlock.name, {
    ...directInsertBlock.attributes,
    ...copiedAttributes
  });
  return dispatch.insertBlock(block, blockIndex + 1, rootClientId);
};

/**
 * Action that toggles the highlighted block state.
 *
 * @param {string}  clientId      The block's clientId.
 * @param {boolean} isHighlighted The highlight state.
 */
function toggleBlockHighlight(clientId, isHighlighted) {
  return {
    type: 'TOGGLE_BLOCK_HIGHLIGHT',
    clientId,
    isHighlighted
  };
}

/**
 * Action that "flashes" the block with a given `clientId` by rhythmically highlighting it.
 *
 * @param {string} clientId Target block client ID.
 */
const flashBlock = clientId => async ({
  dispatch
}) => {
  dispatch(toggleBlockHighlight(clientId, true));
  await new Promise(resolve => setTimeout(resolve, 150));
  dispatch(toggleBlockHighlight(clientId, false));
};

/**
 * Action that sets whether a block has controlled inner blocks.
 *
 * @param {string}  clientId                 The block's clientId.
 * @param {boolean} hasControlledInnerBlocks True if the block's inner blocks are controlled.
 */
function setHasControlledInnerBlocks(clientId, hasControlledInnerBlocks) {
  return {
    type: 'SET_HAS_CONTROLLED_INNER_BLOCKS',
    hasControlledInnerBlocks,
    clientId
  };
}

/**
 * Action that sets whether given blocks are visible on the canvas.
 *
 * @param {Record<string,boolean>} updates For each block's clientId, its new visibility setting.
 */
function setBlockVisibility(updates) {
  return {
    type: 'SET_BLOCK_VISIBILITY',
    updates
  };
}

/**
 * Action that sets whether a block is being temporarily edited as blocks.
 *
 * DO-NOT-USE in production.
 * This action is created for internal/experimental only usage and may be
 * removed anytime without any warning, causing breakage on any plugin or theme invoking it.
 *
 * @param {?string} temporarilyEditingAsBlocks The block's clientId being temporarily edited as blocks.
 * @param {?string} focusModeToRevert          The focus mode to revert after temporarily edit as blocks finishes.
 */
function __unstableSetTemporarilyEditingAsBlocks(temporarilyEditingAsBlocks, focusModeToRevert) {
  return {
    type: 'SET_TEMPORARILY_EDITING_AS_BLOCKS',
    temporarilyEditingAsBlocks,
    focusModeToRevert
  };
}

/**
 * Interface for inserter media requests.
 *
 * @typedef {Object} InserterMediaRequest
 * @property {number} per_page How many items to fetch per page.
 * @property {string} search   The search term to use for filtering the results.
 */

/**
 * Interface for inserter media responses. Any media resource should
 * map their response to this interface, in order to create the core
 * WordPress media blocks (image, video, audio).
 *
 * @typedef {Object} InserterMediaItem
 * @property {string}        title        The title of the media item.
 * @property {string}        url          The source url of the media item.
 * @property {string}        [previewUrl] The preview source url of the media item to display in the media list.
 * @property {number}        [id]         The WordPress id of the media item.
 * @property {number|string} [sourceId]   The id of the media item from external source.
 * @property {string}        [alt]        The alt text of the media item.
 * @property {string}        [caption]    The caption of the media item.
 */

/**
 * Registers a new inserter media category. Once registered, the media category is
 * available in the inserter's media tab.
 *
 * The following interfaces are used:
 *
 * _Type Definition_
 *
 * - _InserterMediaRequest_ `Object`: Interface for inserter media requests.
 *
 * _Properties_
 *
 * - _per_page_ `number`: How many items to fetch per page.
 * - _search_ `string`: The search term to use for filtering the results.
 *
 * _Type Definition_
 *
 * - _InserterMediaItem_ `Object`: Interface for inserter media responses. Any media resource should
 * map their response to this interface, in order to create the core
 * WordPress media blocks (image, video, audio).
 *
 * _Properties_
 *
 * - _title_ `string`: The title of the media item.
 * - _url_ `string: The source url of the media item.
 * - _previewUrl_ `[string]`: The preview source url of the media item to display in the media list.
 * - _id_ `[number]`: The WordPress id of the media item.
 * - _sourceId_ `[number|string]`: The id of the media item from external source.
 * - _alt_ `[string]`: The alt text of the media item.
 * - _caption_ `[string]`: The caption of the media item.
 *
 * @param    {InserterMediaCategory}                                  category                       The inserter media category to register.
 *
 * @example
 * ```js
 *
 * wp.data.dispatch('core/block-editor').registerInserterMediaCategory( {
 * 	 name: 'openverse',
 * 	 labels: {
 * 	 	name: 'Openverse',
 * 	 	search_items: 'Search Openverse',
 * 	 },
 * 	 mediaType: 'image',
 * 	 async fetch( query = {} ) {
 * 	 	const defaultArgs = {
 * 	 		mature: false,
 * 	 		excluded_source: 'flickr,inaturalist,wikimedia',
 * 	 		license: 'pdm,cc0',
 * 	 	};
 * 	 	const finalQuery = { ...query, ...defaultArgs };
 * 	 	// Sometimes you might need to map the supported request params according to `InserterMediaRequest`.
 * 	 	// interface. In this example the `search` query param is named `q`.
 * 	 	const mapFromInserterMediaRequest = {
 * 	 		per_page: 'page_size',
 * 	 		search: 'q',
 * 	 	};
 * 	 	const url = new URL( 'https://api.openverse.org/v1/images/' );
 * 	 	Object.entries( finalQuery ).forEach( ( [ key, value ] ) => {
 * 	 		const queryKey = mapFromInserterMediaRequest[ key ] || key;
 * 	 		url.searchParams.set( queryKey, value );
 * 	 	} );
 * 	 	const response = await window.fetch( url, {
 * 	 		headers: {
 * 	 			'User-Agent': 'WordPress/inserter-media-fetch',
 * 	 		},
 * 	 	} );
 * 	 	const jsonResponse = await response.json();
 * 	 	const results = jsonResponse.results;
 * 	 	return results.map( ( result ) => ( {
 * 	 		...result,
 * 	 		// If your response result includes an `id` prop that you want to access later, it should
 * 	 		// be mapped to `InserterMediaItem`'s `sourceId` prop. This can be useful if you provide
 * 	 		// a report URL getter.
 * 	 		// Additionally you should always clear the `id` value of your response results because
 * 	 		// it is used to identify WordPress media items.
 * 	 		sourceId: result.id,
 * 	 		id: undefined,
 * 	 		caption: result.caption,
 * 	 		previewUrl: result.thumbnail,
 * 	 	} ) );
 * 	 },
 * 	 getReportUrl: ( { sourceId } ) =>
 * 	 	`https://wordpress.org/openverse/image/${ sourceId }/report/`,
 * 	 isExternalResource: true,
 * } );
 * ```
 *
 * @typedef {Object} InserterMediaCategory Interface for inserter media category.
 * @property {string}                                                 name                           The name of the media category, that should be unique among all media categories.
 * @property {Object}                                                 labels                         Labels for the media category.
 * @property {string}                                                 labels.name                    General name of the media category. It's used in the inserter media items list.
 * @property {string}                                                 [labels.search_items='Search'] Label for searching items. Default is ‘Search Posts’ / ‘Search Pages’.
 * @property {('image'|'audio'|'video')}                              mediaType                      The media type of the media category.
 * @property {(InserterMediaRequest) => Promise<InserterMediaItem[]>} fetch                          The function to fetch media items for the category.
 * @property {(InserterMediaItem) => string}                          [getReportUrl]                 If the media category supports reporting media items, this function should return
 *                                                                                                   the report url for the media item. It accepts the `InserterMediaItem` as an argument.
 * @property {boolean}                                                [isExternalResource]           If the media category is an external resource, this should be set to true.
 *                                                                                                   This is used to avoid making a request to the external resource when the user
 */
const registerInserterMediaCategory = category => ({
  select,
  dispatch
}) => {
  if (!category || typeof category !== 'object') {
    console.error('Category should be an `InserterMediaCategory` object.');
    return;
  }
  if (!category.name) {
    console.error('Category should have a `name` that should be unique among all media categories.');
    return;
  }
  if (!category.labels?.name) {
    console.error('Category should have a `labels.name`.');
    return;
  }
  if (!['image', 'audio', 'video'].includes(category.mediaType)) {
    console.error('Category should have `mediaType` property that is one of `image|audio|video`.');
    return;
  }
  if (!category.fetch || typeof category.fetch !== 'function') {
    console.error('Category should have a `fetch` function defined with the following signature `(InserterMediaRequest) => Promise<InserterMediaItem[]>`.');
    return;
  }
  const registeredInserterMediaCategories = select.getRegisteredInserterMediaCategories();
  if (registeredInserterMediaCategories.some(({
    name
  }) => name === category.name)) {
    console.error(`A category is already registered with the same name: "${category.name}".`);
    return;
  }
  if (registeredInserterMediaCategories.some(({
    labels: {
      name
    } = {}
  }) => name === category.labels?.name)) {
    console.error(`A category is already registered with the same labels.name: "${category.labels.name}".`);
    return;
  }
  // `inserterMediaCategories` is a private block editor setting, which means it cannot
  // be updated through the public `updateSettings` action. We preserve this setting as
  // private, so extenders can only add new inserter media categories and don't have any
  // control over the core media categories.
  dispatch({
    type: 'REGISTER_INSERTER_MEDIA_CATEGORY',
    category: {
      ...category,
      isExternalResource: true
    }
  });
};

/**
 * @typedef {import('../components/block-editing-mode').BlockEditingMode} BlockEditingMode
 */

/**
 * Sets the block editing mode for a given block.
 *
 * @see useBlockEditingMode
 *
 * @param {string}           clientId The block client ID, or `''` for the root container.
 * @param {BlockEditingMode} mode     The block editing mode. One of `'disabled'`,
 *                                    `'contentOnly'`, or `'default'`.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function setBlockEditingMode(clientId = '', mode) {
  return {
    type: 'SET_BLOCK_EDITING_MODE',
    clientId,
    mode
  };
}

/**
 * Clears the block editing mode for a given block.
 *
 * @see useBlockEditingMode
 *
 * @param {string} clientId The block client ID, or `''` for the root container.
 *
 * @return {Object} Action object.
 */
function unsetBlockEditingMode(clientId = '') {
  return {
    type: 'UNSET_BLOCK_EDITING_MODE',
    clientId
  };
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/store/index.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

/**
 * Block editor data store configuration.
 *
 * @see https://github.com/WordPress/gutenberg/blob/HEAD/packages/data/README.md#registerStore
 */
const storeConfig = {
  reducer: reducer,
  selectors: selectors_namespaceObject,
  actions: actions_namespaceObject
};

/**
 * Store definition for the block editor namespace.
 *
 * @see https://github.com/WordPress/gutenberg/blob/HEAD/packages/data/README.md#createReduxStore
 */
const store = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.createReduxStore)(STORE_NAME, {
  ...storeConfig,
  persist: ['preferences']
});

// We will be able to use the `register` function once we switch
// the "preferences" persistence to use the new preferences package.
const registeredStore = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.registerStore)(STORE_NAME, {
  ...storeConfig,
  persist: ['preferences']
});
unlock(registeredStore).registerPrivateActions(private_actions_namespaceObject);
unlock(registeredStore).registerPrivateSelectors(private_selectors_namespaceObject);

// TODO: Remove once we switch to the `register` function (see above).
//
// Until then, private functions also need to be attached to the original
// `store` descriptor in order to avoid unit tests failing, which could happen
// when tests create new registries in which they register stores.
//
// @see https://github.com/WordPress/gutenberg/pull/51145#discussion_r1239999590
unlock(store).registerPrivateActions(private_actions_namespaceObject);
unlock(store).registerPrivateSelectors(private_selectors_namespaceObject);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/use-settings/index.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

/**
 * Hook that retrieves the given settings for the block instance in use.
 *
 * It looks up the settings first in the block instance hierarchy.
 * If none are found, it'll look them up in the block editor settings.
 *
 * @param {string[]} paths The paths to the settings.
 * @return {any[]} Returns the values defined for the settings.
 * @example
 * ```js
 * const [ fixed, sticky ] = useSettings( 'position.fixed', 'position.sticky' );
 * ```
 */
function use_settings_useSettings(...paths) {
  const {
    clientId = null
  } = useBlockEditContext();
  return (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.useSelect)(select => unlock(select(store)).getBlockSettings(clientId, ...paths),
  // eslint-disable-next-line react-hooks/exhaustive-deps
  [clientId, ...paths]);
}

/**
 * Hook that retrieves the given setting for the block instance in use.
 *
 * It looks up the setting first in the block instance hierarchy.
 * If none is found, it'll look it up in the block editor settings.
 *
 * @param {string} path The path to the setting.
 * @return {any} Returns the value defined for the setting.
 * @deprecated 6.5.0 Use useSettings instead.
 * @example
 * ```js
 * const isEnabled = useSetting( 'typography.dropCap' );
 * ```
 */
function useSetting(path) {
  external_wp_deprecated_default()('wp.blockEditor.useSetting', {
    since: '6.5',
    alternative: 'wp.blockEditor.useSettings',
    note: 'The new useSettings function can retrieve multiple settings at once, with better performance.'
  });
  const [value] = use_settings_useSettings(path);
  return value;
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/font-sizes/fluid-utils.js
/**
 * The fluid utilities must match the backend equivalent.
 * See: gutenberg_get_typography_font_size_value() in lib/block-supports/typography.php
 * ---------------------------------------------------------------
 */

// Defaults.
const DEFAULT_MAXIMUM_VIEWPORT_WIDTH = '1600px';
const DEFAULT_MINIMUM_VIEWPORT_WIDTH = '320px';
const DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR = 1;
const DEFAULT_MINIMUM_FONT_SIZE_FACTOR_MIN = 0.25;
const DEFAULT_MINIMUM_FONT_SIZE_FACTOR_MAX = 0.75;
const DEFAULT_MINIMUM_FONT_SIZE_LIMIT = '14px';

/**
 * Computes a fluid font-size value that uses clamp(). A minimum and maximum
 * font size OR a single font size can be specified.
 *
 * If a single font size is specified, it is scaled up and down using a logarithmic scale.
 *
 * @example
 * ```js
 * // Calculate fluid font-size value from a minimum and maximum value.
 * const fontSize = getComputedFluidTypographyValue( {
 *     minimumFontSize: '20px',
 *     maximumFontSize: '45px'
 * } );
 * // Calculate fluid font-size value from a single font size.
 * const fontSize = getComputedFluidTypographyValue( {
 *     fontSize: '30px',
 * } );
 * ```
 *
 * @param {Object}        args
 * @param {?string}       args.minimumViewportWidth Minimum viewport size from which type will have fluidity. Optional if fontSize is specified.
 * @param {?string}       args.maximumViewportWidth Maximum size up to which type will have fluidity. Optional if fontSize is specified.
 * @param {string|number} [args.fontSize]           Size to derive maximumFontSize and minimumFontSize from, if necessary. Optional if minimumFontSize and maximumFontSize are specified.
 * @param {?string}       args.maximumFontSize      Maximum font size for any clamp() calculation. Optional.
 * @param {?string}       args.minimumFontSize      Minimum font size for any clamp() calculation. Optional.
 * @param {?number}       args.scaleFactor          A scale factor to determine how fast a font scales within boundaries. Optional.
 * @param {?string}       args.minimumFontSizeLimit The smallest a calculated font size may be. Optional.
 *
 * @return {string|null} A font-size value using clamp().
 */
function getComputedFluidTypographyValue({
  minimumFontSize,
  maximumFontSize,
  fontSize,
  minimumViewportWidth = DEFAULT_MINIMUM_VIEWPORT_WIDTH,
  maximumViewportWidth = DEFAULT_MAXIMUM_VIEWPORT_WIDTH,
  scaleFactor = DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR,
  minimumFontSizeLimit
}) {
  // Validate incoming settings and set defaults.
  minimumFontSizeLimit = !!getTypographyValueAndUnit(minimumFontSizeLimit) ? minimumFontSizeLimit : DEFAULT_MINIMUM_FONT_SIZE_LIMIT;

/*
   * Calculates missing minimumFontSize and maximumFontSize from
   * defaultFontSize if provided.
   */
  if (fontSize) {
    // Parses default font size.
    const fontSizeParsed = getTypographyValueAndUnit(fontSize);

// Protect against invalid units.
    if (!fontSizeParsed?.unit) {
      return null;
    }

// Parses the minimum font size limit, so we can perform checks using it.
    const minimumFontSizeLimitParsed = getTypographyValueAndUnit(minimumFontSizeLimit, {
      coerceTo: fontSizeParsed.unit
    });

// Don't enforce minimum font size if a font size has explicitly set a min and max value.
    if (!!minimumFontSizeLimitParsed?.value && !minimumFontSize && !maximumFontSize) {
      /*
       * If a minimum size was not passed to this function
       * and the user-defined font size is lower than $minimum_font_size_limit,
       * do not calculate a fluid value.
       */
      if (fontSizeParsed?.value <= minimumFontSizeLimitParsed?.value) {
        return null;
      }
    }

// If no fluid max font size is available use the incoming value.
    if (!maximumFontSize) {
      maximumFontSize = `${fontSizeParsed.value}${fontSizeParsed.unit}`;
    }

/*
     * If no minimumFontSize is provided, create one using
     * the given font size multiplied by the min font size scale factor.
     */
    if (!minimumFontSize) {
      const fontSizeValueInPx = fontSizeParsed.unit === 'px' ? fontSizeParsed.value : fontSizeParsed.value * 16;

/*
       * The scale factor is a multiplier that affects how quickly the curve will move towards the minimum,
       * that is, how quickly the size factor reaches 0 given increasing font size values.
       * For a - b * log2(), lower values of b will make the curve move towards the minimum faster.
       * The scale factor is constrained between min and max values.
       */
      const minimumFontSizeFactor = Math.min(Math.max(1 - 0.075 * Math.log2(fontSizeValueInPx), DEFAULT_MINIMUM_FONT_SIZE_FACTOR_MIN), DEFAULT_MINIMUM_FONT_SIZE_FACTOR_MAX);

// Calculates the minimum font size.
      const calculatedMinimumFontSize = roundToPrecision(fontSizeParsed.value * minimumFontSizeFactor, 3);

// Only use calculated min font size if it's > $minimum_font_size_limit value.
      if (!!minimumFontSizeLimitParsed?.value && calculatedMinimumFontSize < minimumFontSizeLimitParsed?.value) {
        minimumFontSize = `${minimumFontSizeLimitParsed.value}${minimumFontSizeLimitParsed.unit}`;
      } else {
        minimumFontSize = `${calculatedMinimumFontSize}${fontSizeParsed.unit}`;
      }
    }
  }

// Grab the minimum font size and normalize it in order to use the value for calculations.
  const minimumFontSizeParsed = getTypographyValueAndUnit(minimumFontSize);

// We get a 'preferred' unit to keep units consistent when calculating,
  // otherwise the result will not be accurate.
  const fontSizeUnit = minimumFontSizeParsed?.unit || 'rem';

// Grabs the maximum font size and normalize it in order to use the value for calculations.
  const maximumFontSizeParsed = getTypographyValueAndUnit(maximumFontSize, {
    coerceTo: fontSizeUnit
  });

// Checks for mandatory min and max sizes, and protects against unsupported units.
  if (!minimumFontSizeParsed || !maximumFontSizeParsed) {
    return null;
  }

// Uses rem for accessible fluid target font scaling.
  const minimumFontSizeRem = getTypographyValueAndUnit(minimumFontSize, {
    coerceTo: 'rem'
  });

// Viewport widths defined for fluid typography. Normalize units
  const maximumViewportWidthParsed = getTypographyValueAndUnit(maximumViewportWidth, {
    coerceTo: fontSizeUnit
  });
  const minimumViewportWidthParsed = getTypographyValueAndUnit(minimumViewportWidth, {
    coerceTo: fontSizeUnit
  });

// Protect against unsupported units.
  if (!maximumViewportWidthParsed || !minimumViewportWidthParsed || !minimumFontSizeRem) {
    return null;
  }

// Calculates the linear factor denominator. If it's 0, we cannot calculate a fluid value.
  const linearDenominator = maximumViewportWidthParsed.value - minimumViewportWidthParsed.value;
  if (!linearDenominator) {
    return null;
  }

// Build CSS rule.
  // Borrowed from https://websemantics.uk/tools/responsive-font-calculator/.
  const minViewportWidthOffsetValue = roundToPrecision(minimumViewportWidthParsed.value / 100, 3);
  const viewportWidthOffset = roundToPrecision(minViewportWidthOffsetValue, 3) + fontSizeUnit;
  const linearFactor = 100 * ((maximumFontSizeParsed.value - minimumFontSizeParsed.value) / linearDenominator);
  const linearFactorScaled = roundToPrecision((linearFactor || 1) * scaleFactor, 3);
  const fluidTargetFontSize = `${minimumFontSizeRem.value}${minimumFontSizeRem.unit} + ((1vw - ${viewportWidthOffset}) * ${linearFactorScaled})`;
  return `clamp(${minimumFontSize}, ${fluidTargetFontSize}, ${maximumFontSize})`;
}

/**
 * Internal method that checks a string for a unit and value and returns an array consisting of `'value'` and `'unit'`, e.g., [ '42', 'rem' ].
 * A raw font size of `value + unit` is expected. If the value is an integer, it will convert to `value + 'px'`.
 *
 * @param {string|number}    rawValue Raw size value from theme.json.
 * @param {Object|undefined} options  Calculation options.
 *
 * @return {{ unit: string, value: number }|null} An object consisting of `'value'` and `'unit'` properties.
 */
function getTypographyValueAndUnit(rawValue, options = {}) {
  if (typeof rawValue !== 'string' && typeof rawValue !== 'number') {
    return null;
  }

// Converts numeric values to pixel values by default.
  if (isFinite(rawValue)) {
    rawValue = `${rawValue}px`;
  }
  const {
    coerceTo,
    rootSizeValue,
    acceptableUnits
  } = {
    coerceTo: '',
    // Default browser font size. Later we could inject some JS to compute this `getComputedStyle( document.querySelector( "html" ) ).fontSize`.
    rootSizeValue: 16,
    acceptableUnits: ['rem', 'px', 'em'],
    ...options
  };
  const acceptableUnitsGroup = acceptableUnits?.join('|');
  const regexUnits = new RegExp(`^(\\d*\\.?\\d+)(${acceptableUnitsGroup}){1,1}$`);
  const matches = rawValue.match(regexUnits);

// We need a number value and a unit.
  if (!matches || matches.length < 3) {
    return null;
  }
  let [, value, unit] = matches;
  let returnValue = parseFloat(value);
  if ('px' === coerceTo && ('em' === unit || 'rem' === unit)) {
    returnValue = returnValue * rootSizeValue;
    unit = coerceTo;
  }
  if ('px' === unit && ('em' === coerceTo || 'rem' === coerceTo)) {
    returnValue = returnValue / rootSizeValue;
    unit = coerceTo;
  }

/*
   * No calculation is required if swapping between em and rem yet,
   * since we assume a root size value. Later we might like to differentiate between
   * :root font size (rem) and parent element font size (em) relativity.
   */
  if (('em' === coerceTo || 'rem' === coerceTo) && ('em' === unit || 'rem' === unit)) {
    unit = coerceTo;
  }
  return {
    value: roundToPrecision(returnValue, 3),
    unit
  };
}

/**
 * Returns a value rounded to defined precision.
 * Returns `undefined` if the value is not a valid finite number.
 *
 * @param {number} value  Raw value.
 * @param {number} digits The number of digits to appear after the decimal point
 *
 * @return {number|undefined} Value rounded to standard precision.
 */
function roundToPrecision(value, digits = 3) {
  const base = Math.pow(10, digits);
  return Number.isFinite(value) ? parseFloat(Math.round(value * base) / base) : undefined;
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/global-styles/typography-utils.js
/**
 * The fluid utilities must match the backend equivalent.
 * See: gutenberg_get_typography_font_size_value() in lib/block-supports/typography.php
 * ---------------------------------------------------------------
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

/**
 * @typedef {Object} FluidPreset
 * @property {string|undefined}  max A maximum font size value.
 * @property {?string|undefined} min A minimum font size value.
 */

/**
 * @typedef {Object} Preset
 * @property {?string|?number}               size  A default font size.
 * @property {string}                        name  A font size name, displayed in the UI.
 * @property {string}                        slug  A font size slug
 * @property {boolean|FluidPreset|undefined} fluid Specifies the minimum and maximum font size value of a fluid font size.
 */

/**
 * @typedef {Object} TypographySettings
 * @property {?string} minViewportWidth  Minimum viewport size from which type will have fluidity. Optional if size is specified.
 * @property {?string} maxViewportWidth  Maximum size up to which type will have fluidity. Optional if size is specified.
 * @property {?number} scaleFactor       A scale factor to determine how fast a font scales within boundaries. Optional.
 * @property {?number} minFontSizeFactor How much to scale defaultFontSize by to derive minimumFontSize. Optional.
 * @property {?string} minFontSize       The smallest a calculated font size may be. Optional.
 */

/**
 * Returns a font-size value based on a given font-size preset.
 * Takes into account fluid typography parameters and attempts to return a css formula depending on available, valid values.
 *
 * @param {Preset}                     preset
 * @param {Object}                     settings
 * @param {boolean|TypographySettings} settings.typography.fluid  Whether fluid typography is enabled, and, optionally, fluid font size options.
 * @param {Object?}                    settings.typography.layout Layout options.
 *
 * @return {string|*} A font-size value or the value of preset.size.
 */
function getTypographyFontSizeValue(preset, settings) {
  const {
    size: defaultSize
  } = preset;
  if (!isFluidTypographyEnabled(settings?.typography)) {
    return defaultSize;
  }
  /*
   * Checks whether a font size has explicitly bypassed fluid calculations.
   * Also catches falsy values and 0/'0'.
   * Fluid calculations cannot be performed on `0`.
   */
  if (!defaultSize || '0' === defaultSize || false === preset?.fluid) {
    return defaultSize;
  }
  let fluidTypographySettings = getFluidTypographyOptionsFromSettings(settings);
  fluidTypographySettings = typeof fluidTypographySettings?.fluid === 'object' ? fluidTypographySettings?.fluid : {};
  const fluidFontSizeValue = getComputedFluidTypographyValue({
    minimumFontSize: preset?.fluid?.min,
    maximumFontSize: preset?.fluid?.max,
    fontSize: defaultSize,
    minimumFontSizeLimit: fluidTypographySettings?.minFontSize,
    maximumViewportWidth: fluidTypographySettings?.maxViewportWidth,
    minimumViewportWidth: fluidTypographySettings?.minViewportWidth
  });
  if (!!fluidFontSizeValue) {
    return fluidFontSizeValue;
  }
  return defaultSize;
}
function isFluidTypographyEnabled(typographySettings) {
  const fluidSettings = typographySettings?.fluid;
  return true === fluidSettings || fluidSettings && typeof fluidSettings === 'object' && Object.keys(fluidSettings).length > 0;
}

/**
 * Returns fluid typography settings from theme.json setting object.
 *
 * @param {Object} settings            Theme.json settings
 * @param {Object} settings.typography Theme.json typography settings
 * @param {Object} settings.layout     Theme.json layout settings
 * @return {TypographySettings} Fluid typography settings
 */
function getFluidTypographyOptionsFromSettings(settings) {
  const typographySettings = settings?.typography;
  const layoutSettings = settings?.layout;
  const defaultMaxViewportWidth = getTypographyValueAndUnit(layoutSettings?.wideSize) ? layoutSettings?.wideSize : null;
  return isFluidTypographyEnabled(typographySettings) && defaultMaxViewportWidth ? {
    fluid: {
      maxViewportWidth: defaultMaxViewportWidth,
      ...typographySettings.fluid
    }
  } : {
    fluid: typographySettings?.fluid
  };
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/global-styles/utils.js
/**
 * External dependencies
 */

/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

/* Supporting data. */
const ROOT_BLOCK_SELECTOR = 'body';
const ROOT_CSS_PROPERTIES_SELECTOR = ':root';
const PRESET_METADATA = [{
  path: ['color', 'palette'],
  valueKey: 'color',
  cssVarInfix: 'color',
  classes: [{
    classSuffix: 'color',
    propertyName: 'color'
  }, {
    classSuffix: 'background-color',
    propertyName: 'background-color'
  }, {
    classSuffix: 'border-color',
    propertyName: 'border-color'
  }]
}, {
  path: ['color', 'gradients'],
  valueKey: 'gradient',
  cssVarInfix: 'gradient',
  classes: [{
    classSuffix: 'gradient-background',
    propertyName: 'background'
  }]
}, {
  path: ['color', 'duotone'],
  valueKey: 'colors',
  cssVarInfix: 'duotone',
  valueFunc: ({
    slug
  }) => `url( '#wp-duotone-${slug}' )`,
  classes: []
}, {
  path: ['shadow', 'presets'],
  valueKey: 'shadow',
  cssVarInfix: 'shadow',
  classes: []
}, {
  path: ['typography', 'fontSizes'],
  valueFunc: (preset, settings) => getTypographyFontSizeValue(preset, settings),
  valueKey: 'size',
  cssVarInfix: 'font-size',
  classes: [{
    classSuffix: 'font-size',
    propertyName: 'font-size'
  }]
}, {
  path: ['typography', 'fontFamilies'],
  valueKey: 'fontFamily',
  cssVarInfix: 'font-family',
  classes: [{
    classSuffix: 'font-family',
    propertyName: 'font-family'
  }]
}, {
  path: ['spacing', 'spacingSizes'],
  valueKey: 'size',
  cssVarInfix: 'spacing',
  valueFunc: ({
    size
  }) => size,
  classes: []
}];
const STYLE_PATH_TO_CSS_VAR_INFIX = {
  'color.background': 'color',
  'color.text': 'color',
  'filter.duotone': 'duotone',
  'elements.link.color.text': 'color',
  'elements.link.:hover.color.text': 'color',
  'elements.link.typography.fontFamily': 'font-family',
  'elements.link.typography.fontSize': 'font-size',
  'elements.button.color.text': 'color',
  'elements.button.color.background': 'color',
  'elements.caption.color.text': 'color',
  'elements.button.typography.fontFamily': 'font-family',
  'elements.button.typography.fontSize': 'font-size',
  'elements.heading.color': 'color',
  'elements.heading.color.background': 'color',
  'elements.heading.typography.fontFamily': 'font-family',
  'elements.heading.gradient': 'gradient',
  'elements.heading.color.gradient': 'gradient',
  'elements.h1.color': 'color',
  'elements.h1.color.background': 'color',
  'elements.h1.typography.fontFamily': 'font-family',
  'elements.h1.color.gradient': 'gradient',
  'elements.h2.color': 'color',
  'elements.h2.color.background': 'color',
  'elements.h2.typography.fontFamily': 'font-family',
  'elements.h2.color.gradient': 'gradient',
  'elements.h3.color': 'color',
  'elements.h3.color.background': 'color',
  'elements.h3.typography.fontFamily': 'font-family',
  'elements.h3.color.gradient': 'gradient',
  'elements.h4.color': 'color',
  'elements.h4.color.background': 'color',
  'elements.h4.typography.fontFamily': 'font-family',
  'elements.h4.color.gradient': 'gradient',
  'elements.h5.color': 'color',
  'elements.h5.color.background': 'color',
  'elements.h5.typography.fontFamily': 'font-family',
  'elements.h5.color.gradient': 'gradient',
  'elements.h6.color': 'color',
  'elements.h6.color.background': 'color',
  'elements.h6.typography.fontFamily': 'font-family',
  'elements.h6.color.gradient': 'gradient',
  'color.gradient': 'gradient',
  shadow: 'shadow',
  'typography.fontSize': 'font-size',
  'typography.fontFamily': 'font-family'
};

// A static list of block attributes that store global style preset slugs.
const STYLE_PATH_TO_PRESET_BLOCK_ATTRIBUTE = {
  'color.background': 'backgroundColor',
  'color.text': 'textColor',
  'color.gradient': 'gradient',
  'typography.fontSize': 'fontSize',
  'typography.fontFamily': 'fontFamily'
};
function useToolsPanelDropdownMenuProps() {
  const isMobile = (0,external_wp_compose_namespaceObject.useViewportMatch)('medium', '<');
  return !isMobile ? {
    popoverProps: {
      placement: 'left-start',
      // For non-mobile, inner sidebar width (248px) - button width (24px) - border (1px) + padding (16px) + spacing (20px)
      offset: 259
    }
  } : {};
}
function findInPresetsBy(features, blockName, presetPath, presetProperty, presetValueValue) {
  // Block presets take priority above root level presets.
  const orderedPresetsByOrigin = [getValueFromObjectPath(features, ['blocks', blockName, ...presetPath]), getValueFromObjectPath(features, presetPath)];
  for (const presetByOrigin of orderedPresetsByOrigin) {
    if (presetByOrigin) {
      // Preset origins ordered by priority.
      const origins = ['custom', 'theme', 'default'];
      for (const origin of origins) {
        const presets = presetByOrigin[origin];
        if (presets) {
          const presetObject = presets.find(preset => preset[presetProperty] === presetValueValue);
          if (presetObject) {
            if (presetProperty === 'slug') {
              return presetObject;
            }
            // If there is a highest priority preset with the same slug but different value the preset we found was overwritten and should be ignored.
            const highestPresetObjectWithSameSlug = findInPresetsBy(features, blockName, presetPath, 'slug', presetObject.slug);
            if (highestPresetObjectWithSameSlug[presetProperty] === presetObject[presetProperty]) {
              return presetObject;
            }
            return undefined;
          }
        }
      }
    }
  }
}
function getPresetVariableFromValue(features, blockName, variableStylePath, presetPropertyValue) {
  if (!presetPropertyValue) {
    return presetPropertyValue;
  }
  const cssVarInfix = STYLE_PATH_TO_CSS_VAR_INFIX[variableStylePath];
  const metadata = PRESET_METADATA.find(data => data.cssVarInfix === cssVarInfix);
  if (!metadata) {
    // The property doesn't have preset data
    // so the value should be returned as it is.
    return presetPropertyValue;
  }
  const {
    valueKey,
    path
  } = metadata;
  const presetObject = findInPresetsBy(features, blockName, path, valueKey, presetPropertyValue);
  if (!presetObject) {
    // Value wasn't found in the presets,
    // so it must be a custom value.
    return presetPropertyValue;
  }
  return `var:preset|${cssVarInfix}|${presetObject.slug}`;
}
function getValueFromPresetVariable(features, blockName, variable, [presetType, slug]) {
  const metadata = PRESET_METADATA.find(data => data.cssVarInfix === presetType);
  if (!metadata) {
    return variable;
  }
  const presetObject = findInPresetsBy(features.settings, blockName, metadata.path, 'slug', slug);
  if (presetObject) {
    const {
      valueKey
    } = metadata;
    const result = presetObject[valueKey];
    return getValueFromVariable(features, blockName, result);
  }
  return variable;
}
function getValueFromCustomVariable(features, blockName, variable, path) {
  var _getValueFromObjectPa;
  const result = (_getValueFromObjectPa = getValueFromObjectPath(features.settings, ['blocks', blockName, 'custom', ...path])) !== null && _getValueFromObjectPa !== void 0 ? _getValueFromObjectPa : getValueFromObjectPath(features.settings, ['custom', ...path]);
  if (!result) {
    return variable;
  }
  // A variable may reference another variable so we need recursion until we find the value.
  return getValueFromVariable(features, blockName, result);
}

/**
 * Attempts to fetch the value of a theme.json CSS variable.
 *
 * @param {Object}   features  GlobalStylesContext config, e.g., user, base or merged. Represents the theme.json tree.
 * @param {string}   blockName The name of a block as represented in the styles property. E.g., 'root' for root-level, and 'core/${blockName}' for blocks.
 * @param {string|*} variable  An incoming style value. A CSS var value is expected, but it could be any value.
 * @return {string|*|{ref}} The value of the CSS var, if found. If not found, the passed variable argument.
 */
function getValueFromVariable(features, blockName, variable) {
  if (!variable || typeof variable !== 'string') {
    if (variable?.ref && typeof variable?.ref === 'string') {
      const refPath = variable.ref.split('.');
      variable = getValueFromObjectPath(features, refPath);
      // Presence of another ref indicates a reference to another dynamic value.
      // Pointing to another dynamic value is not supported.
      if (!variable || !!variable?.ref) {
        return variable;
      }
    } else {
      return variable;
    }
  }
  const USER_VALUE_PREFIX = 'var:';
  const THEME_VALUE_PREFIX = 'var(--wp--';
  const THEME_VALUE_SUFFIX = ')';
  let parsedVar;
  if (variable.startsWith(USER_VALUE_PREFIX)) {
    parsedVar = variable.slice(USER_VALUE_PREFIX.length).split('|');
  } else if (variable.startsWith(THEME_VALUE_PREFIX) && variable.endsWith(THEME_VALUE_SUFFIX)) {
    parsedVar = variable.slice(THEME_VALUE_PREFIX.length, -THEME_VALUE_SUFFIX.length).split('--');
  } else {
    // We don't know how to parse the value: either is raw of uses complex CSS such as `calc(1px * var(--wp--variable) )`
    return variable;
  }
  const [type, ...path] = parsedVar;
  if (type === 'preset') {
    return getValueFromPresetVariable(features, blockName, variable, path);
  }
  if (type === 'custom') {
    return getValueFromCustomVariable(features, blockName, variable, path);
  }
  return variable;
}

/**
 * Function that scopes a selector with another one. This works a bit like
 * SCSS nesting except the `&` operator isn't supported.
 *
 * @example
 * ```js
 * const scope = '.a, .b .c';
 * const selector = '> .x, .y';
 * const merged = scopeSelector( scope, selector );
 * // merged is '.a > .x, .a .y, .b .c > .x, .b .c .y'
 * ```
 *
 * @param {string} scope    Selector to scope to.
 * @param {string} selector Original selector.
 *
 * @return {string} Scoped selector.
 */
function scopeSelector(scope, selector) {
  if (!scope || !selector) {
    return selector;
  }
  const scopes = scope.split(',');
  const selectors = selector.split(',');
  const selectorsScoped = [];
  scopes.forEach(outer => {
    selectors.forEach(inner => {
      selectorsScoped.push(`${outer.trim()} ${inner.trim()}`);
    });
  });
  return selectorsScoped.join(', ');
}

/**
 * Scopes a collection of selectors for features and subfeatures.
 *
 * @example
 * ```js
 * const scope = '.custom-scope';
 * const selectors = {
 *     color: '.wp-my-block p',
 *     typography: { fontSize: '.wp-my-block caption' },
 * };
 * const result = scopeFeatureSelector( scope, selectors );
 * // result is {
 * //     color: '.custom-scope .wp-my-block p',
 * //     typography: { fonSize: '.custom-scope .wp-my-block caption' },
 * // }
 * ```
 *
 * @param {string} scope     Selector to scope collection of selectors with.
 * @param {Object} selectors Collection of feature selectors e.g.
 *
 * @return {Object|undefined} Scoped collection of feature selectors.
 */
function scopeFeatureSelectors(scope, selectors) {
  if (!scope || !selectors) {
    return;
  }
  const featureSelectors = {};
  Object.entries(selectors).forEach(([feature, selector]) => {
    if (typeof selector === 'string') {
      featureSelectors[feature] = scopeSelector(scope, selector);
    }
    if (typeof selector === 'object') {
      featureSelectors[feature] = {};
      Object.entries(selector).forEach(([subfeature, subfeatureSelector]) => {
        featureSelectors[feature][subfeature] = scopeSelector(scope, subfeatureSelector);
      });
    }
  });
  return featureSelectors;
}

/**
 * Appends a sub-selector to an existing one.
 *
 * Given the compounded `selector` "h1, h2, h3"
 * and the `toAppend` selector ".some-class" the result will be
 * "h1.some-class, h2.some-class, h3.some-class".
 *
 * @param {string} selector Original selector.
 * @param {string} toAppend Selector to append.
 *
 * @return {string} The new selector.
 */
function appendToSelector(selector, toAppend) {
  if (!selector.includes(',')) {
    return selector + toAppend;
  }
  const selectors = selector.split(',');
  const newSelectors = selectors.map(sel => sel + toAppend);
  return newSelectors.join(',');
}

/**
 * Compares global style variations according to their styles and settings properties.
 *
 * @example
 * ```js
 * const globalStyles = { styles: { typography: { fontSize: '10px' } }, settings: {} };
 * const variation = { styles: { typography: { fontSize: '10000px' } }, settings: {} };
 * const isEqual = areGlobalStyleConfigsEqual( globalStyles, variation );
 * // false
 * ```
 *
 * @param {Object} original  A global styles object.
 * @param {Object} variation A global styles object.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether `original` and `variation` match.
 */
function areGlobalStyleConfigsEqual(original, variation) {
  if (typeof original !== 'object' || typeof variation !== 'object') {
    return original === variation;
  }
  return es6_default()(original?.styles, variation?.styles) && es6_default()(original?.settings, variation?.settings);
}

/**
 * Generates the selector for a block style variation by creating the
 * appropriate CSS class and adding it to the ancestor portion of the block's
 * selector.
 *
 * For example, take the Button block which has a compound selector:
 * `.wp-block-button .wp-block-button__link`. With a variation named 'custom',
 * the class `.is-style-custom` should be added to the `.wp-block-button`
 * ancestor only.
 *
 * This function will take into account comma separated and complex selectors.
 *
 * @param {string} variation     Name for the variation.
 * @param {string} blockSelector CSS selector for the block.
 *
 * @return {string} CSS selector for the block style variation.
 */
function getBlockStyleVariationSelector(variation, blockSelector) {
  const variationClass = `.is-style-${variation}`;
  if (!blockSelector) {
    return variationClass;
  }
  const ancestorRegex = /((?::$[^)]+$)?\s*)([^\s:]+)/;
  const addVariationClass = (_match, group1, group2) => {
    return group1 + group2 + variationClass;
  };
  const result = blockSelector.split(',').map(part => part.replace(ancestorRegex, addVariationClass));
  return result.join(',');
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/global-styles/context.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const DEFAULT_GLOBAL_STYLES_CONTEXT = {
  user: {},
  base: {},
  merged: {},
  setUserConfig: () => {}
};
const GlobalStylesContext = (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.createContext)(DEFAULT_GLOBAL_STYLES_CONTEXT);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/global-styles/hooks.js
/**
 * External dependencies
 */

/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

/**
 * React hook that overrides a global settings object with block and element specific settings.
 *
 * @param {Object}     parentSettings Settings object.
 * @param {blockName?} blockName      Block name.
 * @param {element?}   element        Element name.
 *
 * @return {Object} Merge of settings and supports.
 */
function useSettingsForBlockElement(parentSettings, blockName, element) {
  const {
    supportedStyles,
    supports
  } = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.useSelect)(select => {
    return {
      supportedStyles: unlock(select(external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.store)).getSupportedStyles(blockName, element),
      supports: select(external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.store).getBlockType(blockName)?.supports
    };
  }, [blockName, element]);
  return (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useMemo)(() => {
    const updatedSettings = {
      ...parentSettings
    };
    if (!supportedStyles.includes('fontSize')) {
      updatedSettings.typography = {
        ...updatedSettings.typography,
        fontSizes: {},
        customFontSize: false,
        defaultFontSizes: false
      };
    }
    if (!supportedStyles.includes('fontFamily')) {
      updatedSettings.typography = {
        ...updatedSettings.typography,
        fontFamilies: {}
      };
    }
    updatedSettings.color = {
      ...updatedSettings.color,
      text: updatedSettings.color?.text && supportedStyles.includes('color'),
      background: updatedSettings.color?.background && (supportedStyles.includes('background') || supportedStyles.includes('backgroundColor')),
      button: updatedSettings.color?.button && supportedStyles.includes('buttonColor'),
      heading: updatedSettings.color?.heading && supportedStyles.includes('headingColor'),
      link: updatedSettings.color?.link && supportedStyles.includes('linkColor'),
      caption: updatedSettings.color?.caption && supportedStyles.includes('captionColor')
    };

// Some blocks can enable background colors but disable gradients.
    if (!supportedStyles.includes('background')) {
      updatedSettings.color.gradients = [];
      updatedSettings.color.customGradient = false;
    }

// If filters are not supported by the block/element, disable duotone.
    if (!supportedStyles.includes('filter')) {
      updatedSettings.color.defaultDuotone = false;
      updatedSettings.color.customDuotone = false;
    }
    ['lineHeight', 'fontStyle', 'fontWeight', 'letterSpacing', 'textAlign', 'textTransform', 'textDecoration', 'writingMode'].forEach(key => {
      if (!supportedStyles.includes(key)) {
        updatedSettings.typography = {
          ...updatedSettings.typography,
          [key]: false
        };
      }
    });

// The column-count style is named text column to reduce confusion with
    // the columns block and manage expectations from the support.
    // See: https://github.com/WordPress/gutenberg/pull/33587
    if (!supportedStyles.includes('columnCount')) {
      updatedSettings.typography = {
        ...updatedSettings.typography,
        textColumns: false
      };
    }
    ['contentSize', 'wideSize'].forEach(key => {
      if (!supportedStyles.includes(key)) {
        updatedSettings.layout = {
          ...updatedSettings.layout,
          [key]: false
        };
      }
    });
    ['padding', 'margin', 'blockGap'].forEach(key => {
      if (!supportedStyles.includes(key)) {
        updatedSettings.spacing = {
          ...updatedSettings.spacing,
          [key]: false
        };
      }
      const sides = Array.isArray(supports?.spacing?.[key]) ? supports?.spacing?.[key] : supports?.spacing?.[key]?.sides;
      // Check if spacing type is supported before adding sides.
      if (sides?.length && updatedSettings.spacing?.[key]) {
        updatedSettings.spacing = {
          ...updatedSettings.spacing,
          [key]: {
            ...updatedSettings.spacing?.[key],
            sides
          }
        };
      }
    });
    ['aspectRatio', 'minHeight'].forEach(key => {
      if (!supportedStyles.includes(key)) {
        updatedSettings.dimensions = {
          ...updatedSettings.dimensions,
          [key]: false
        };
      }
    });
    ['radius', 'color', 'style', 'width'].forEach(key => {
      if (!supportedStyles.includes('border' + key.charAt(0).toUpperCase() + key.slice(1))) {
        updatedSettings.border = {
          ...updatedSettings.border,
          [key]: false
        };
      }
    });
    updatedSettings.shadow = supportedStyles.includes('shadow') ? updatedSettings.shadow : false;

// Text alignment is only available for blocks.
    if (element) {
      updatedSettings.typography.textAlign = false;
    }
    return updatedSettings;
  }, [parentSettings, supportedStyles, supports, element]);
}
function useColorsPerOrigin(settings) {
  const customColors = settings?.color?.palette?.custom;
  const themeColors = settings?.color?.palette?.theme;
  const defaultColors = settings?.color?.palette?.default;
  const shouldDisplayDefaultColors = settings?.color?.defaultPalette;
  return (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useMemo)(() => {
    const result = [];
    if (themeColors && themeColors.length) {
      result.push({
        name: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject._x)('Theme', 'Indicates this palette comes from the theme.'),
        colors: themeColors
      });
    }
    if (shouldDisplayDefaultColors && defaultColors && defaultColors.length) {
      result.push({
        name: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject._x)('Default', 'Indicates this palette comes from WordPress.'),
        colors: defaultColors
      });
    }
    if (customColors && customColors.length) {
      result.push({
        name: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject._x)('Custom', 'Indicates this palette is created by the user.'),
        colors: customColors
      });
    }
    return result;
  }, [customColors, themeColors, defaultColors, shouldDisplayDefaultColors]);
}
function useGradientsPerOrigin(settings) {
  const customGradients = settings?.color?.gradients?.custom;
  const themeGradients = settings?.color?.gradients?.theme;
  const defaultGradients = settings?.color?.gradients?.default;
  const shouldDisplayDefaultGradients = settings?.color?.defaultGradients;
  return (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useMemo)(() => {
    const result = [];
    if (themeGradients && themeGradients.length) {
      result.push({
        name: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject._x)('Theme', 'Indicates this palette comes from the theme.'),
        gradients: themeGradients
      });
    }
    if (shouldDisplayDefaultGradients && defaultGradients && defaultGradients.length) {
      result.push({
        name: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject._x)('Default', 'Indicates this palette comes from WordPress.'),
        gradients: defaultGradients
      });
    }
    if (customGradients && customGradients.length) {
      result.push({
        name: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject._x)('Custom', 'Indicates this palette is created by the user.'),
        gradients: customGradients
      });
    }
    return result;
  }, [customGradients, themeGradients, defaultGradients, shouldDisplayDefaultGradients]);
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/clsx/dist/clsx.mjs
function r(e){var t,f,n="";if("string"==typeof e||"number"==typeof e)n+=e;else if("object"==typeof e)if(Array.isArray(e)){var o=e.length;for(t=0;t<o;t++)e[t]&&(f=r(e[t]))&&(n&&(n+=" "),n+=f)}else for(f in e)e[f]&&(n&&(n+=" "),n+=f);return n}function clsx(){for(var e,t,f=0,n="",o=arguments.length;f<o;f++)(e=arguments[f])&&(t=r(e))&&(n&&(n+=" "),n+=t);return n}/* harmony default export */ const dist_clsx = (clsx);
;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/hooks/utils.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

/**
 * External dependencies
 */

/**
 * Removed falsy values from nested object.
 *
 * @param {*} object
 * @return {*} Object cleaned from falsy values
 */

/**
 * Check whether serialization of specific block support feature or set should
 * be skipped.
 *
 * @param {string|Object} blockNameOrType Block name or block type object.
 * @param {string}        featureSet      Name of block support feature set.
 * @param {string}        feature         Name of the individual feature to check.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether serialization should occur.
 */
function shouldSkipSerialization(blockNameOrType, featureSet, feature) {
  const support = (0,external_wp_blocks_namespaceObject.getBlockSupport)(blockNameOrType, featureSet);
  const skipSerialization = support?.__experimentalSkipSerialization;
  if (Array.isArray(skipSerialization)) {
    return skipSerialization.includes(feature);
  }
  return skipSerialization;
}
const pendingStyleOverrides = new WeakMap();
function useStyleOverride({
  id,
  css,
  assets,
  __unstableType,
  variation,
  clientId
} = {}) {
  const {
    setStyleOverride,
    deleteStyleOverride
  } = unlock((0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.useDispatch)(store));
  const registry = (0,external_wp_data_namespaceObject.useRegistry)();
  const fallbackId = (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useId)();
  (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useEffect)(() => {
    // Unmount if there is CSS and assets are empty.
    if (!css && !assets) {
      return;
    }
    const _id = id || fallbackId;
    const override = {
      id,
      css,
      assets,
      __unstableType,
      variation,
      clientId
    };
    // Batch updates to style overrides to avoid triggering cascading renders
    // for each style override block included in a tree and optimize initial render.
    if (!pendingStyleOverrides.get(registry)) {
      pendingStyleOverrides.set(registry, []);
    }
    pendingStyleOverrides.get(registry).push([_id, override]);
    window.queueMicrotask(() => {
      if (pendingStyleOverrides.get(registry)?.length) {
        registry.batch(() => {
          pendingStyleOverrides.get(registry).forEach(args => {
            setStyleOverride(...args);
          });
          pendingStyleOverrides.set(registry, []);
        });
      }
    });
    return () => {
      const isPending = pendingStyleOverrides.get(registry)?.find(([currentId]) => currentId === _id);
      if (isPending) {
        pendingStyleOverrides.set(registry, pendingStyleOverrides.get(registry).filter(([currentId]) => currentId !== _id));
      } else {
        deleteStyleOverride(_id);
      }
    };
  }, [id, css, clientId, assets, __unstableType, fallbackId, setStyleOverride, deleteStyleOverride, registry]);
}

/**
 * Based on the block and its context, returns an object of all the block settings.
 * This object can be passed as a prop to all the Styles UI components
 * (TypographyPanel, DimensionsPanel...).
 *
 * @param {string} name         Block name.
 * @param {*}      parentLayout Parent layout.
 *
 * @return {Object} Settings object.
 */
function useBlockSettings(name, parentLayout) {
  const [backgroundImage, backgroundSize, customFontFamilies, defaultFontFamilies, themeFontFamilies, defaultFontSizesEnabled, customFontSizes, defaultFontSizes, themeFontSizes, customFontSize, fontStyle, fontWeight, lineHeight, textAlign, textColumns, textDecoration, writingMode, textTransform, letterSpacing, padding, margin, blockGap, defaultSpacingSizesEnabled, customSpacingSize, userSpacingSizes, defaultSpacingSizes, themeSpacingSizes, units, aspectRatio, minHeight, layout, borderColor, borderRadius, borderStyle, borderWidth, customColorsEnabled, customColors, customDuotone, themeColors, defaultColors, defaultPalette, defaultDuotone, userDuotonePalette, themeDuotonePalette, defaultDuotonePalette, userGradientPalette, themeGradientPalette, defaultGradientPalette, defaultGradients, areCustomGradientsEnabled, isBackgroundEnabled, isLinkEnabled, isTextEnabled, isHeadingEnabled, isButtonEnabled, shadow] = use_settings_useSettings('background.backgroundImage', 'background.backgroundSize', 'typography.fontFamilies.custom', 'typography.fontFamilies.default', 'typography.fontFamilies.theme', 'typography.defaultFontSizes', 'typography.fontSizes.custom', 'typography.fontSizes.default', 'typography.fontSizes.theme', 'typography.customFontSize', 'typography.fontStyle', 'typography.fontWeight', 'typography.lineHeight', 'typography.textAlign', 'typography.textColumns', 'typography.textDecoration', 'typography.writingMode', 'typography.textTransform', 'typography.letterSpacing', 'spacing.padding', 'spacing.margin', 'spacing.blockGap', 'spacing.defaultSpacingSizes', 'spacing.customSpacingSize', 'spacing.spacingSizes.custom', 'spacing.spacingSizes.default', 'spacing.spacingSizes.theme', 'spacing.units', 'dimensions.aspectRatio', 'dimensions.minHeight', 'layout', 'border.color', 'border.radius', 'border.style', 'border.width', 'color.custom', 'color.palette.custom', 'color.customDuotone', 'color.palette.theme', 'color.palette.default', 'color.defaultPalette', 'color.defaultDuotone', 'color.duotone.custom', 'color.duotone.theme', 'color.duotone.default', 'color.gradients.custom', 'color.gradients.theme', 'color.gradients.default', 'color.defaultGradients', 'color.customGradient', 'color.background', 'color.link', 'color.text', 'color.heading', 'color.button', 'shadow');
  const rawSettings = (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useMemo)(() => {
    return {
      background: {
        backgroundImage,
        backgroundSize
      },
      color: {
        palette: {
          custom: customColors,
          theme: themeColors,
          default: defaultColors
        },
        gradients: {
          custom: userGradientPalette,
          theme: themeGradientPalette,
          default: defaultGradientPalette
        },
        duotone: {
          custom: userDuotonePalette,
          theme: themeDuotonePalette,
          default: defaultDuotonePalette
        },
        defaultGradients,
        defaultPalette,
        defaultDuotone,
        custom: customColorsEnabled,
        customGradient: areCustomGradientsEnabled,
        customDuotone,
        background: isBackgroundEnabled,
        link: isLinkEnabled,
        heading: isHeadingEnabled,
        button: isButtonEnabled,
        text: isTextEnabled
      },
      typography: {
        fontFamilies: {
          custom: customFontFamilies,
          default: defaultFontFamilies,
          theme: themeFontFamilies
        },
        fontSizes: {
          custom: customFontSizes,
          default: defaultFontSizes,
          theme: themeFontSizes
        },
        customFontSize,
        defaultFontSizes: defaultFontSizesEnabled,
        fontStyle,
        fontWeight,
        lineHeight,
        textAlign,
        textColumns,
        textDecoration,
        textTransform,
        letterSpacing,
        writingMode
      },
      spacing: {
        spacingSizes: {
          custom: userSpacingSizes,
          default: defaultSpacingSizes,
          theme: themeSpacingSizes
        },
        customSpacingSize,
        defaultSpacingSizes: defaultSpacingSizesEnabled,
        padding,
        margin,
        blockGap,
        units
      },
      border: {
        color: borderColor,
        radius: borderRadius,
        style: borderStyle,
        width: borderWidth
      },
      dimensions: {
        aspectRatio,
        minHeight
      },
      layout,
      parentLayout,
      shadow
    };
  }, [backgroundImage, backgroundSize, customFontFamilies, defaultFontFamilies, themeFontFamilies, defaultFontSizesEnabled, customFontSizes, defaultFontSizes, themeFontSizes, customFontSize, fontStyle, fontWeight, lineHeight, textAlign, textColumns, textDecoration, textTransform, letterSpacing, writingMode, padding, margin, blockGap, defaultSpacingSizesEnabled, customSpacingSize, userSpacingSizes, defaultSpacingSizes, themeSpacingSizes, units, aspectRatio, minHeight, layout, parentLayout, borderColor, borderRadius, borderStyle, borderWidth, customColorsEnabled, customColors, customDuotone, themeColors, defaultColors, defaultPalette, defaultDuotone, userDuotonePalette, themeDuotonePalette, defaultDuotonePalette, userGradientPalette, themeGradientPalette, defaultGradientPalette, defaultGradients, areCustomGradientsEnabled, isBackgroundEnabled, isLinkEnabled, isTextEnabled, isHeadingEnabled, isButtonEnabled, shadow]);
  return useSettingsForBlockElement(rawSettings, name);
}
function createBlockEditFilter(features) {
  // We don't want block controls to re-render when typing inside a block.
  // `memo` will prevent re-renders unless props change, so only pass the
  // needed props and not the whole attributes object.
  features = features.map(settings => {
    return {
      ...settings,
      Edit: (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.memo)(settings.edit)
    };
  });
  const withBlockEditHooks = (0,external_wp_compose_namespaceObject.createHigherOrderComponent)(OriginalBlockEdit => props => {
    const context = useBlockEditContext();
    // CAUTION: code added before this line will be executed for all
    // blocks, not just those that support the feature! Code added
    // above this line should be carefully evaluated for its impact on
    // performance.
    return [...features.map((feature, i) => {
      const {
        Edit,
        hasSupport,
        attributeKeys = [],
        shareWithChildBlocks
      } = feature;
      const shouldDisplayControls = context[mayDisplayControlsKey] || context[mayDisplayParentControlsKey] && shareWithChildBlocks;
      if (!shouldDisplayControls || !hasSupport(props.name)) {
        return null;
      }
      const neededProps = {};
      for (const key of attributeKeys) {
        if (props.attributes[key]) {
          neededProps[key] = props.attributes[key];
        }
      }
      return /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(Edit
      // We can use the index because the array length
      // is fixed per page load right now.
      , {
        name: props.name,
        isSelected: props.isSelected,
        clientId: props.clientId,
        setAttributes: props.setAttributes,
        __unstableParentLayout: props.__unstableParentLayout
        // This component is pure, so only pass needed
        // props!!!
        ,
        ...neededProps
      }, i);
    }), /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(OriginalBlockEdit, {
      ...props
    }, "edit")];
  }, 'withBlockEditHooks');
  (0,external_wp_hooks_namespaceObject.addFilter)('editor.BlockEdit', 'core/editor/hooks', withBlockEditHooks);
}
function BlockProps({
  index,
  useBlockProps,
  setAllWrapperProps,
  ...props
}) {
  const wrapperProps = useBlockProps(props);
  const setWrapperProps = next => setAllWrapperProps(prev => {
    const nextAll = [...prev];
    nextAll[index] = next;
    return nextAll;
  });
  // Setting state after every render is fine because this component is
  // pure and will only re-render when needed props change.
  (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useEffect)(() => {
    // We could shallow compare the props, but since this component only
    // changes when needed attributes change, the benefit is probably small.
    setWrapperProps(wrapperProps);
    return () => {
      setWrapperProps(undefined);
    };
  });
  return null;
}
const BlockPropsPure = (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.memo)(BlockProps);
function createBlockListBlockFilter(features) {
  const withBlockListBlockHooks = (0,external_wp_compose_namespaceObject.createHigherOrderComponent)(BlockListBlock => props => {
    const [allWrapperProps, setAllWrapperProps] = (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useState)(Array(features.length).fill(undefined));
    return [...features.map((feature, i) => {
      const {
        hasSupport,
        attributeKeys = [],
        useBlockProps,
        isMatch
      } = feature;
      const neededProps = {};
      for (const key of attributeKeys) {
        if (props.attributes[key]) {
          neededProps[key] = props.attributes[key];
        }
      }
      if (
      // Skip rendering if none of the needed attributes are
      // set.
      !Object.keys(neededProps).length || !hasSupport(props.name) || isMatch && !isMatch(neededProps)) {
        return null;
      }
      return /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(BlockPropsPure
      // We can use the index because the array length
      // is fixed per page load right now.
      , {
        index: i,
        useBlockProps: useBlockProps
        // This component is pure, so we must pass a stable
        // function reference.
        ,
        setAllWrapperProps: setAllWrapperProps,
        name: props.name,
        clientId: props.clientId
        // This component is pure, so only pass needed
        // props!!!
        ,
        ...neededProps
      }, i);
    }), /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(BlockListBlock, {
      ...props,
      wrapperProps: allWrapperProps.filter(Boolean).reduce((acc, wrapperProps) => {
        return {
          ...acc,
          ...wrapperProps,
          className: dist_clsx(acc.className, wrapperProps.className),
          style: {
            ...acc.style,
            ...wrapperProps.style
          }
        };
      }, props.wrapperProps || {})
    }, "edit")];
  }, 'withBlockListBlockHooks');
  (0,external_wp_hooks_namespaceObject.addFilter)('editor.BlockListBlock', 'core/editor/hooks', withBlockListBlockHooks);
}
function createBlockSaveFilter(features) {
  function extraPropsFromHooks(props, name, attributes) {
    return features.reduce((accu, feature) => {
      const {
        hasSupport,
        attributeKeys = [],
        addSaveProps
      } = feature;
      const neededAttributes = {};
      for (const key of attributeKeys) {
        if (attributes[key]) {
          neededAttributes[key] = attributes[key];
        }
      }
      if (
      // Skip rendering if none of the needed attributes are
      // set.
      !Object.keys(neededAttributes).length || !hasSupport(name)) {
        return accu;
      }
      return addSaveProps(accu, name, neededAttributes);
    }, props);
  }
  (0,external_wp_hooks_namespaceObject.addFilter)('blocks.getSaveContent.extraProps', 'core/editor/hooks', extraPropsFromHooks, 0);
  (0,external_wp_hooks_namespaceObject.addFilter)('blocks.getSaveContent.extraProps', 'core/editor/hooks', props => {
    // Previously we had a filter deleting the className if it was an empty
    // string. That filter is no longer running, so now we need to delete it
    // here.
    if (props.hasOwnProperty('className') && !props.className) {
      delete props.className;
    }
    return props;
  });
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/hooks/compat.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: external ["wp","components"]
const external_wp_components_namespaceObject = window["wp"]["components"];
;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/block-controls/groups.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const BlockControlsDefault = (0,external_wp_components_namespaceObject.createSlotFill)('BlockControls');
const BlockControlsBlock = (0,external_wp_components_namespaceObject.createSlotFill)('BlockControlsBlock');
const BlockControlsInline = (0,external_wp_components_namespaceObject.createSlotFill)('BlockFormatControls');
const BlockControlsOther = (0,external_wp_components_namespaceObject.createSlotFill)('BlockControlsOther');
const BlockControlsParent = (0,external_wp_components_namespaceObject.createSlotFill)('BlockControlsParent');
const groups = {
  default: BlockControlsDefault,
  block: BlockControlsBlock,
  inline: BlockControlsInline,
  other: BlockControlsOther,
  parent: BlockControlsParent
};
/* harmony default export */ const block_controls_groups = (groups);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/block-controls/hook.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/block-controls/fill.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: external ["wp","warning"]
const external_wp_warning_namespaceObject = window["wp"]["warning"];
var external_wp_warning_default = /*#__PURE__*/__webpack_require__.n(external_wp_warning_namespaceObject);
;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/block-controls/slot.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

const {
  ComponentsContext
} = unlock(external_wp_components_namespaceObject.privateApis);
function BlockControlsSlot({
  group = 'default',
  ...props
}) {
  const toolbarState = (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useContext)(external_wp_components_namespaceObject.__experimentalToolbarContext);
  const contextState = (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useContext)(ComponentsContext);
  const fillProps = (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useMemo)(() => ({
    forwardedContext: [[external_wp_components_namespaceObject.__experimentalToolbarContext.Provider, {
      value: toolbarState
    }], [ComponentsContext.Provider, {
      value: contextState
    }]]
  }), [toolbarState, contextState]);
  const Slot = block_controls_groups[group]?.Slot;
  const fills = (0,external_wp_components_namespaceObject.__experimentalUseSlotFills)(Slot?.__unstableName);
  if (!Slot) {
     true ? external_wp_warning_default()(`Unknown BlockControls group "${group}" provided.`) : 0;
    return null;
  }
  if (!fills?.length) {
    return null;
  }
  const slot = /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(Slot, {
    ...props,
    bubblesVirtually: true,
    fillProps: fillProps
  });
  if (group === 'default') {
    return slot;
  }
  return /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_components_namespaceObject.ToolbarGroup, {
    children: slot
  });
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/block-controls/index.js
/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

const BlockControls = BlockControlsFill;
BlockControls.Slot = BlockControlsSlot;

// This is just here for backward compatibility.
const BlockFormatControls = props => {
  return /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(BlockControlsFill, {
    group: "inline",
    ...props
  });
};
BlockFormatControls.Slot = props => {
  return /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(BlockControlsSlot, {
    group: "inline",
    ...props
  });
};
/* harmony default export */ const block_controls = (BlockControls);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/icons/build-module/library/justify-left.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const justifyLeft = /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.SVG, {
  xmlns: "http://www.w3.org/2000/svg",
  viewBox: "0 0 24 24",
  children: /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "M9 9v6h11V9H9zM4 20h1.5V4H4v16z"
  })
});
/* harmony default export */ const justify_left = (justifyLeft);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/icons/build-module/library/justify-center.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const justifyCenter = /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.SVG, {
  xmlns: "http://www.w3.org/2000/svg",
  viewBox: "0 0 24 24",
  children: /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "M12.5 15v5H11v-5H4V9h7V4h1.5v5h7v6h-7Z"
  })
});
/* harmony default export */ const justify_center = (justifyCenter);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/icons/build-module/library/justify-right.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const justifyRight = /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.SVG, {
  xmlns: "http://www.w3.org/2000/svg",
  viewBox: "0 0 24 24",
  children: /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "M4 15h11V9H4v6zM18.5 4v16H20V4h-1.5z"
  })
});
/* harmony default export */ const justify_right = (justifyRight);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/icons/build-module/library/justify-space-between.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const justifySpaceBetween = /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.SVG, {
  xmlns: "http://www.w3.org/2000/svg",
  viewBox: "0 0 24 24",
  children: /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "M9 15h6V9H9v6zm-5 5h1.5V4H4v16zM18.5 4v16H20V4h-1.5z"
  })
});
/* harmony default export */ const justify_space_between = (justifySpaceBetween);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/icons/build-module/library/justify-stretch.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const justifyStretch = /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.SVG, {
  xmlns: "http://www.w3.org/2000/svg",
  viewBox: "0 0 24 24",
  children: /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "M4 4H5.5V20H4V4ZM7 10L17 10V14L7 14V10ZM20 4H18.5V20H20V4Z"
  })
});
/* harmony default export */ const justify_stretch = (justifyStretch);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/icons/build-module/library/arrow-right.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const arrowRight = /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.SVG, {
  xmlns: "http://www.w3.org/2000/svg",
  viewBox: "0 0 24 24",
  children: /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "m14.5 6.5-1 1 3.7 3.7H4v1.6h13.2l-3.7 3.7 1 1 5.6-5.5z"
  })
});
/* harmony default export */ const arrow_right = (arrowRight);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/icons/build-module/library/arrow-down.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const arrowDown = /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.SVG, {
  xmlns: "http://www.w3.org/2000/svg",
  viewBox: "0 0 24 24",
  children: /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "m16.5 13.5-3.7 3.7V4h-1.5v13.2l-3.8-3.7-1 1 5.5 5.6 5.5-5.6z"
  })
});
/* harmony default export */ const arrow_down = (arrowDown);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/layouts/definitions.js
// Layout definitions keyed by layout type.
// Provides a common definition of slugs, classnames, base styles, and spacing styles for each layout type.
// If making changes or additions to layout definitions, be sure to update the corresponding PHP definitions in
// `block-supports/layout.php` so that the server-side and client-side definitions match.
const LAYOUT_DEFINITIONS = {
  default: {
    name: 'default',
    slug: 'flow',
    className: 'is-layout-flow',
    baseStyles: [{
      selector: ' > .alignleft',
      rules: {
        float: 'left',
        'margin-inline-start': '0',
        'margin-inline-end': '2em'
      }
    }, {
      selector: ' > .alignright',
      rules: {
        float: 'right',
        'margin-inline-start': '2em',
        'margin-inline-end': '0'
      }
    }, {
      selector: ' > .aligncenter',
      rules: {
        'margin-left': 'auto !important',
        'margin-right': 'auto !important'
      }
    }],
    spacingStyles: [{
      selector: ' > :first-child',
      rules: {
        'margin-block-start': '0'
      }
    }, {
      selector: ' > :last-child',
      rules: {
        'margin-block-end': '0'
      }
    }, {
      selector: ' > *',
      rules: {
        'margin-block-start': null,
        'margin-block-end': '0'
      }
    }]
  },
  constrained: {
    name: 'constrained',
    slug: 'constrained',
    className: 'is-layout-constrained',
    baseStyles: [{
      selector: ' > .alignleft',
      rules: {
        float: 'left',
        'margin-inline-start': '0',
        'margin-inline-end': '2em'
      }
    }, {
      selector: ' > .alignright',
      rules: {
        float: 'right',
        'margin-inline-start': '2em',
        'margin-inline-end': '0'
      }
    }, {
      selector: ' > .aligncenter',
      rules: {
        'margin-left': 'auto !important',
        'margin-right': 'auto !important'
      }
    }, {
      selector: ' > :where(:not(.alignleft):not(.alignright):not(.alignfull))',
      rules: {
        'max-width': 'var(--wp--style--global--content-size)',
        'margin-left': 'auto !important',
        'margin-right': 'auto !important'
      }
    }, {
      selector: ' > .alignwide',
      rules: {
        'max-width': 'var(--wp--style--global--wide-size)'
      }
    }],
    spacingStyles: [{
      selector: ' > :first-child',
      rules: {
        'margin-block-start': '0'
      }
    }, {
      selector: ' > :last-child',
      rules: {
        'margin-block-end': '0'
      }
    }, {
      selector: ' > *',
      rules: {
        'margin-block-start': null,
        'margin-block-end': '0'
      }
    }]
  },
  flex: {
    name: 'flex',
    slug: 'flex',
    className: 'is-layout-flex',
    displayMode: 'flex',
    baseStyles: [{
      selector: '',
      rules: {
        'flex-wrap': 'wrap',
        'align-items': 'center'
      }
    }, {
      selector: ' > :is(*, div)',
      // :is(*, div) instead of just * increases the specificity by 001.
      rules: {
        margin: '0'
      }
    }],
    spacingStyles: [{
      selector: '',
      rules: {
        gap: null
      }
    }]
  },
  grid: {
    name: 'grid',
    slug: 'grid',
    className: 'is-layout-grid',
    displayMode: 'grid',
    baseStyles: [{
      selector: ' > :is(*, div)',
      // :is(*, div) instead of just * increases the specificity by 001.
      rules: {
        margin: '0'
      }
    }],
    spacingStyles: [{
      selector: '',
      rules: {
        gap: null
      }
    }]
  }
};

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/layouts/utils.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

/**
 * Utility to generate the proper CSS selector for layout styles.
 *
 * @param {string} selectors CSS selector, also supports multiple comma-separated selectors.
 * @param {string} append    The string to append.
 *
 * @return {string} - CSS selector.
 */
function appendSelectors(selectors, append = '') {
  // Ideally we shouldn't need the `.editor-styles-wrapper` increased specificity here
  // The problem though is that we have a `.editor-styles-wrapper p { margin: reset; }` style
  // it's used to reset the default margin added by wp-admin to paragraphs
  // so we need this to be higher speficity otherwise, it won't be applied to paragraphs inside containers
  // When the post editor is fully iframed, this extra classname could be removed.

return selectors.split(',').map(subselector => `.editor-styles-wrapper ${subselector}${append ? ` ${append}` : ''}`).join(',');
}

/**
 * Get generated blockGap CSS rules based on layout definitions provided in theme.json
 * Falsy values in the layout definition's spacingStyles rules will be swapped out
 * with the provided `blockGapValue`.
 *
 * @param {string} selector          The CSS selector to target for the generated rules.
 * @param {Object} layoutDefinitions Layout definitions object.
 * @param {string} layoutType        The layout type (e.g. `default` or `flex`).
 * @param {string} blockGapValue     The current blockGap value to be applied.
 * @return {string} The generated CSS rules.
 */
function getBlockGapCSS(selector, layoutDefinitions = LAYOUT_DEFINITIONS, layoutType, blockGapValue) {
  let output = '';
  if (layoutDefinitions?.[layoutType]?.spacingStyles?.length && blockGapValue) {
    layoutDefinitions[layoutType].spacingStyles.forEach(gapStyle => {
      output += `${appendSelectors(selector, gapStyle.selector.trim())} { `;
      output += Object.entries(gapStyle.rules).map(([cssProperty, value]) => `${cssProperty}: ${value ? value : blockGapValue}`).join('; ');
      output += '; }';
    });
  }
  return output;
}

/**
 * Helper method to assign contextual info to clarify
 * alignment settings.
 *
 * Besides checking if `contentSize` and `wideSize` have a
 * value, we now show this information only if their values
 * are not a `css var`. This needs to change when parsing
 * css variables land.
 *
 * @see https://github.com/WordPress/gutenberg/pull/34710#issuecomment-918000752
 *
 * @param {Object} layout The layout object.
 * @return {Object} An object with contextual info per alignment.
 */
function getAlignmentsInfo(layout) {
  const {
    contentSize,
    wideSize,
    type = 'default'
  } = layout;
  const alignmentInfo = {};
  const sizeRegex = /^(?!0)\d+(px|em|rem|vw|vh|%|svw|lvw|dvw|svh|lvh|dvh|vi|svi|lvi|dvi|vb|svb|lvb|dvb|vmin|svmin|lvmin|dvmin|vmax|svmax|lvmax|dvmax)?$/i;
  if (sizeRegex.test(contentSize) && type === 'constrained') {
    // translators: %s: container size (i.e. 600px etc)
    alignmentInfo.none = (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.sprintf)((0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Max %s wide'), contentSize);
  }
  if (sizeRegex.test(wideSize)) {
    // translators: %s: container size (i.e. 600px etc)
    alignmentInfo.wide = (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.sprintf)((0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Max %s wide'), wideSize);
  }
  return alignmentInfo;
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/icons/build-module/library/sides-all.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const sidesAll = /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.SVG, {
  xmlns: "http://www.w3.org/2000/svg",
  viewBox: "0 0 24 24",
  children: /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "m7.5 6h9v-1.5h-9zm0 13.5h9v-1.5h-9zm-3-3h1.5v-9h-1.5zm13.5-9v9h1.5v-9z"
  })
});
/* harmony default export */ const sides_all = (sidesAll);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/icons/build-module/library/sides-horizontal.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const sidesHorizontal = /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsxs)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.SVG, {
  xmlns: "http://www.w3.org/2000/svg",
  viewBox: "0 0 24 24",
  children: [/*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "m7.5 6h9v-1.5h-9zm0 13.5h9v-1.5h-9zm-3-3h1.5v-9h-1.5zm13.5-9v9h1.5v-9z",
    style: {
      opacity: 0.25
    }
  }), /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "m4.5 7.5v9h1.5v-9z"
  }), /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "m18 7.5v9h1.5v-9z"
  })]
});
/* harmony default export */ const sides_horizontal = (sidesHorizontal);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/icons/build-module/library/sides-vertical.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const sidesVertical = /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsxs)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.SVG, {
  xmlns: "http://www.w3.org/2000/svg",
  viewBox: "0 0 24 24",
  children: [/*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "m7.5 6h9v-1.5h-9zm0 13.5h9v-1.5h-9zm-3-3h1.5v-9h-1.5zm13.5-9v9h1.5v-9z",
    style: {
      opacity: 0.25
    }
  }), /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "m7.5 6h9v-1.5h-9z"
  }), /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "m7.5 19.5h9v-1.5h-9z"
  })]
});
/* harmony default export */ const sides_vertical = (sidesVertical);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/icons/build-module/library/sides-top.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const sidesTop = /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsxs)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.SVG, {
  xmlns: "http://www.w3.org/2000/svg",
  viewBox: "0 0 24 24",
  children: [/*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "m7.5 6h9v-1.5h-9zm0 13.5h9v-1.5h-9zm-3-3h1.5v-9h-1.5zm13.5-9v9h1.5v-9z",
    style: {
      opacity: 0.25
    }
  }), /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "m16.5 6h-9v-1.5h9z"
  })]
});
/* harmony default export */ const sides_top = (sidesTop);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/icons/build-module/library/sides-right.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const sidesRight = /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsxs)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.SVG, {
  xmlns: "http://www.w3.org/2000/svg",
  viewBox: "0 0 24 24",
  children: [/*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "m7.5 6h9v-1.5h-9zm0 13.5h9v-1.5h-9zm-3-3h1.5v-9h-1.5zm13.5-9v9h1.5v-9z",
    style: {
      opacity: 0.25
    }
  }), /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "m18 16.5v-9h1.5v9z"
  })]
});
/* harmony default export */ const sides_right = (sidesRight);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/icons/build-module/library/sides-bottom.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const sidesBottom = /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsxs)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.SVG, {
  xmlns: "http://www.w3.org/2000/svg",
  viewBox: "0 0 24 24",
  children: [/*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "m7.5 6h9v-1.5h-9zm0 13.5h9v-1.5h-9zm-3-3h1.5v-9h-1.5zm13.5-9v9h1.5v-9z",
    style: {
      opacity: 0.25
    }
  }), /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "m16.5 19.5h-9v-1.5h9z",
    style: {
      fill: '#1e1e1e'
    }
  })]
});
/* harmony default export */ const sides_bottom = (sidesBottom);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/icons/build-module/library/sides-left.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const sidesLeft = /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsxs)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.SVG, {
  xmlns: "http://www.w3.org/2000/svg",
  viewBox: "0 0 24 24",
  children: [/*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "m7.5 6h9v-1.5h-9zm0 13.5h9v-1.5h-9zm-3-3h1.5v-9h-1.5zm13.5-9v9h1.5v-9z",
    style: {
      opacity: 0.25
    }
  }), /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "m4.5 16.5v-9h1.5v9z"
  })]
});
/* harmony default export */ const sides_left = (sidesLeft);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/spacing-sizes-control/utils.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Checks is given value is a spacing preset.
 *
 * @param {string} value Value to check
 *
 * @return {boolean} Return true if value is string in format var:preset|spacing|.
 */
function isValueSpacingPreset(value) {
  if (!value?.includes) {
    return false;
  }
  return value === '0' || value.includes('var:preset|spacing|');
}

/**
 * Converts a spacing preset into a custom value.
 *
 * @param {string} value        Value to convert
 * @param {Array}  spacingSizes Array of the current spacing preset objects
 *
 * @return {string} Mapping of the spacing preset to its equivalent custom value.
 */
function getCustomValueFromPreset(value, spacingSizes) {
  if (!isValueSpacingPreset(value)) {
    return value;
  }
  const slug = getSpacingPresetSlug(value);
  const spacingSize = spacingSizes.find(size => String(size.slug) === slug);
  return spacingSize?.size;
}

/**
 * Converts a custom value to preset value if one can be found.
 *
 * Returns value as-is if no match is found.
 *
 * @param {string} value        Value to convert
 * @param {Array}  spacingSizes Array of the current spacing preset objects
 *
 * @return {string} The preset value if it can be found.
 */
function getPresetValueFromCustomValue(value, spacingSizes) {
  // Return value as-is if it is undefined or is already a preset, or '0';
  if (!value || isValueSpacingPreset(value) || value === '0') {
    return value;
  }
  const spacingMatch = spacingSizes.find(size => String(size.size) === String(value));
  if (spacingMatch?.slug) {
    return `var:preset|spacing|${spacingMatch.slug}`;
  }
  return value;
}

/**
 * Converts a spacing preset into a custom value.
 *
 * @param {string} value Value to convert.
 *
 * @return {string | undefined} CSS var string for given spacing preset value.
 */
function getSpacingPresetCssVar(value) {
  if (!value) {
    return;
  }
  const slug = value.match(/var:preset\|spacing\|(.+)/);
  if (!slug) {
    return value;
  }
  return `var(--wp--preset--spacing--${slug[1]})`;
}

/**
 * Returns the slug section of the given spacing preset string.
 *
 * @param {string} value Value to extract slug from.
 *
 * @return {string|undefined} The int value of the slug from given spacing preset.
 */
function getSpacingPresetSlug(value) {
  if (!value) {
    return;
  }
  if (value === '0' || value === 'default') {
    return value;
  }
  const slug = value.match(/var:preset\|spacing\|(.+)/);
  return slug ? slug[1] : undefined;
}

/**
 * Converts spacing preset value into a Range component value .
 *
 * @param {string} presetValue  Value to convert to Range value.
 * @param {Array}  spacingSizes Array of current spacing preset value objects.
 *
 * @return {number} The int value for use in Range control.
 */
function getSliderValueFromPreset(presetValue, spacingSizes) {
  if (presetValue === undefined) {
    return 0;
  }
  const slug = parseFloat(presetValue, 10) === 0 ? '0' : getSpacingPresetSlug(presetValue);
  const sliderValue = spacingSizes.findIndex(spacingSize => {
    return String(spacingSize.slug) === slug;
  });

// Returning NaN rather than undefined as undefined makes range control thumb sit in center
  return sliderValue !== -1 ? sliderValue : NaN;
}

/**
 * Gets an items with the most occurrence within an array
 * https://stackoverflow.com/a/20762713
 *
 * @param {Array<any>} arr Array of items to check.
 * @return {any} The item with the most occurrences.
 */
function mode(arr) {
  return arr.sort((a, b) => arr.filter(v => v === a).length - arr.filter(v => v === b).length).pop();
}

/**
 * Gets the 'all' input value from values data.
 *
 * @param {Object} values Box spacing values
 *
 * @return {string} The most common value from all sides of box.
 */
function getAllRawValue(values = {}) {
  return mode(Object.values(values));
}

/**
 * Checks to determine if values are mixed.
 *
 * @param {Object} values Box values.
 * @param {Array}  sides  Sides that values relate to.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether values are mixed.
 */
function isValuesMixed(values = {}, sides = ALL_SIDES) {
  return Object.values(values).length >= 1 && Object.values(values).length < sides.length || new Set(Object.values(values)).size > 1;
}

/**
 * Checks to determine if values are defined.
 *
 * @param {Object} values Box values.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether values are defined.
 */
function isValuesDefined(values) {
  if (values === undefined || values === null) {
    return false;
  }
  return Object.values(values).filter(value => !!value).length > 0;
}

/**
 * Determines whether a particular axis has support. If no axis is
 * specified, this function checks if either axis is supported.
 *
 * @param {Array}  sides Supported sides.
 * @param {string} axis  Which axis to check.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether there is support for the specified axis or both axes.
 */
function hasAxisSupport(sides, axis) {
  if (!sides || !sides.length) {
    return false;
  }
  const hasHorizontalSupport = sides.includes('horizontal') || sides.includes('left') && sides.includes('right');
  const hasVerticalSupport = sides.includes('vertical') || sides.includes('top') && sides.includes('bottom');
  if (axis === 'horizontal') {
    return hasHorizontalSupport;
  }
  if (axis === 'vertical') {
    return hasVerticalSupport;
  }
  return hasHorizontalSupport || hasVerticalSupport;
}

/**
 * Determines which menu options should be included in the SidePicker.
 *
 * @param {Array} sides Supported sides.
 *
 * @return {Object} Menu options with each option containing label & icon.
 */
function getSupportedMenuItems(sides) {
  if (!sides || !sides.length) {
    return {};
  }
  const menuItems = {};

// Determine the primary "side" menu options.
  const hasHorizontalSupport = hasAxisSupport(sides, 'horizontal');
  const hasVerticalSupport = hasAxisSupport(sides, 'vertical');
  if (hasHorizontalSupport && hasVerticalSupport) {
    menuItems.axial = {
      label: LABELS.axial,
      icon: ICONS.axial
    };
  } else if (hasHorizontalSupport) {
    menuItems.axial = {
      label: LABELS.horizontal,
      icon: ICONS.horizontal
    };
  } else if (hasVerticalSupport) {
    menuItems.axial = {
      label: LABELS.vertical,
      icon: ICONS.vertical
    };
  }

// Track whether we have any individual sides so we can omit the custom
  // option if required.
  let numberOfIndividualSides = 0;
  ALL_SIDES.forEach(side => {
    if (sides.includes(side)) {
      numberOfIndividualSides += 1;
      menuItems[side] = {
        label: LABELS[side],
        icon: ICONS[side]
      };
    }
  });

// Add custom item if there are enough sides to warrant a separated view.
  if (numberOfIndividualSides > 1) {
    menuItems.custom = {
      label: LABELS.custom,
      icon: ICONS.custom
    };
  }
  return menuItems;
}

/**
 * Checks if the supported sides are balanced for each axis.
 * - Horizontal - both left and right sides are supported.
 * - Vertical - both top and bottom are supported.
 *
 * @param {Array} sides The supported sides which may be axes as well.
 *
 * @return {boolean} Whether or not the supported sides are balanced.
 */
function hasBalancedSidesSupport(sides = []) {
  const counts = {
    top: 0,
    right: 0,
    bottom: 0,
    left: 0
  };
  sides.forEach(side => counts[side] += 1);
  return (counts.top + counts.bottom) % 2 === 0 && (counts.left + counts.right) % 2 === 0;
}

/**
 * Determines which view the SpacingSizesControl should default to on its
 * first render; Axial, Custom, or Single side.
 *
 * @param {Object} values Current side values.
 * @param {Array}  sides  Supported sides.
 *
 * @return {string} View to display.
 */
function getInitialView(values = {}, sides) {
  const {
    top,
    right,
    bottom,
    left
  } = values;
  const sideValues = [top, right, bottom, left].filter(Boolean);

// Axial ( Horizontal & vertical ).
  // - Has axial side support
  // - Has axial side values which match
  // - Has no values and the supported sides are balanced
  const hasMatchingAxialValues = top === bottom && left === right && (!!top || !!left);
  const hasNoValuesAndBalancedSides = !sideValues.length && hasBalancedSidesSupport(sides);
  if (hasAxisSupport(sides) && (hasMatchingAxialValues || hasNoValuesAndBalancedSides)) {
    return VIEWS.axial;
  }

// Single side.
  // - Ensure the side returned is the first side that has a value.
  if (sideValues.length === 1) {
    let side;
    Object.entries(values).some(([key, value]) => {
      side = key;
      return value !== undefined;
    });
    return side;
  }

// Only single side supported and no value defined.
  if (sides?.length === 1 && !sideValues.length) {
    return sides[0];
  }

// Default to the Custom (separated sides) view.
  return VIEWS.custom;
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/hooks/gap.js
/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

/**
 * Returns a BoxControl object value from a given blockGap style value.
 * The string check is for backwards compatibility before Gutenberg supported
 * split gap values (row and column) and the value was a string n + unit.
 *
 * @param {string? | Object?} blockGapValue A block gap string or axial object value, e.g., '10px' or { top: '10px', left: '10px'}.
 * @return {Object|null}                    A value to pass to the BoxControl component.
 */
function getGapBoxControlValueFromStyle(blockGapValue) {
  if (!blockGapValue) {
    return null;
  }
  const isValueString = typeof blockGapValue === 'string';
  return {
    top: isValueString ? blockGapValue : blockGapValue?.top,
    left: isValueString ? blockGapValue : blockGapValue?.left
  };
}

/**
 * Returns a CSS value for the `gap` property from a given blockGap style.
 *
 * @param {string? | Object?} blockGapValue A block gap string or axial object value, e.g., '10px' or { top: '10px', left: '10px'}.
 * @param {string?}           defaultValue  A default gap value.
 * @return {string|null}                    The concatenated gap value (row and column).
 */
function getGapCSSValue(blockGapValue, defaultValue = '0') {
  const blockGapBoxControlValue = getGapBoxControlValueFromStyle(blockGapValue);
  if (!blockGapBoxControlValue) {
    return null;
  }
  const row = getSpacingPresetCssVar(blockGapBoxControlValue?.top) || defaultValue;
  const column = getSpacingPresetCssVar(blockGapBoxControlValue?.left) || defaultValue;
  return row === column ? row : `${row} ${column}`;
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/block-vertical-alignment-control/icons.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/block-vertical-alignment-control/ui.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

/**
 * @see https://github.com/WordPress/gutenberg/blob/HEAD/packages/block-editor/src/components/block-vertical-alignment-toolbar/README.md
 */
/* harmony default export */ const ui = (BlockVerticalAlignmentUI);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/block-vertical-alignment-control/index.js
/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

/**
 * @see https://github.com/WordPress/gutenberg/blob/HEAD/packages/block-editor/src/components/block-vertical-alignment-control/README.md
 */

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/justify-content-control/ui.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/justify-content-control/index.js
/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

/**
 * @see https://github.com/WordPress/gutenberg/blob/HEAD/packages/block-editor/src/components/justify-content-control/README.md
 */

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/layouts/flex.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

// Used with the default, horizontal flex orientation.

const justifyContentMap = {
  left: 'flex-start',
  right: 'flex-end',
  center: 'center',
  'space-between': 'space-between'
};

// Used with the vertical (column) flex orientation.
const alignItemsMap = {
  left: 'flex-start',
  right: 'flex-end',
  center: 'center',
  stretch: 'stretch'
};
const verticalAlignmentMap = {
  top: 'flex-start',
  center: 'center',
  bottom: 'flex-end',
  stretch: 'stretch',
  'space-between': 'space-between'
};
const flexWrapOptions = ['wrap', 'nowrap'];
/* harmony default export */ const flex = ({
  name: 'flex',
  label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Flex'),
  inspectorControls: function FlexLayoutInspectorControls({
    layout = {},
    onChange,
    layoutBlockSupport = {}
  }) {
    const {
      allowOrientation = true
    } = layoutBlockSupport;
    return /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsxs)(external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.Fragment, {
      children: [/*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsxs)(external_wp_components_namespaceObject.Flex, {
        children: [/*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_components_namespaceObject.FlexItem, {
          children: /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(FlexLayoutJustifyContentControl, {
            layout: layout,
            onChange: onChange
          })
        }), /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_components_namespaceObject.FlexItem, {
          children: allowOrientation && /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(OrientationControl, {
            layout: layout,
            onChange: onChange
          })
        })]
      }), /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(FlexWrapControl, {
        layout: layout,
        onChange: onChange
      })]
    });
  },
  toolBarControls: function FlexLayoutToolbarControls({
    layout = {},
    onChange,
    layoutBlockSupport
  }) {
    if (layoutBlockSupport?.allowSwitching) {
      return null;
    }
    const {
      allowVerticalAlignment = true
    } = layoutBlockSupport;
    return /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsxs)(block_controls, {
      group: "block",
      __experimentalShareWithChildBlocks: true,
      children: [/*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(FlexLayoutJustifyContentControl, {
        layout: layout,
        onChange: onChange,
        isToolbar: true
      }), allowVerticalAlignment && /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(FlexLayoutVerticalAlignmentControl, {
        layout: layout,
        onChange: onChange,
        isToolbar: true
      })]
    });
  },
  getLayoutStyle: function getLayoutStyle({
    selector,
    layout,
    style,
    blockName,
    hasBlockGapSupport,
    layoutDefinitions = LAYOUT_DEFINITIONS
  }) {
    const {
      orientation = 'horizontal'
    } = layout;

// If a block's block.json skips serialization for spacing or spacing.blockGap,
    // don't apply the user-defined value to the styles.
    const blockGapValue = style?.spacing?.blockGap && !shouldSkipSerialization(blockName, 'spacing', 'blockGap') ? getGapCSSValue(style?.spacing?.blockGap, '0.5em') : undefined;
    const justifyContent = justifyContentMap[layout.justifyContent];
    const flexWrap = flexWrapOptions.includes(layout.flexWrap) ? layout.flexWrap : 'wrap';
    const verticalAlignment = verticalAlignmentMap[layout.verticalAlignment];
    const alignItems = alignItemsMap[layout.justifyContent] || alignItemsMap.left;
    let output = '';
    const rules = [];
    if (flexWrap && flexWrap !== 'wrap') {
      rules.push(`flex-wrap: ${flexWrap}`);
    }
    if (orientation === 'horizontal') {
      if (verticalAlignment) {
        rules.push(`align-items: ${verticalAlignment}`);
      }
      if (justifyContent) {
        rules.push(`justify-content: ${justifyContent}`);
      }
    } else {
      if (verticalAlignment) {
        rules.push(`justify-content: ${verticalAlignment}`);
      }
      rules.push('flex-direction: column');
      rules.push(`align-items: ${alignItems}`);
    }
    if (rules.length) {
      output = `${appendSelectors(selector)} {
				${rules.join('; ')};
			}`;
    }

// Output blockGap styles based on rules contained in layout definitions in theme.json.
    if (hasBlockGapSupport && blockGapValue) {
      output += getBlockGapCSS(selector, layoutDefinitions, 'flex', blockGapValue);
    }
    return output;
  },
  getOrientation(layout) {
    const {
      orientation = 'horizontal'
    } = layout;
    return orientation;
  },
  getAlignments() {
    return [];
  }
});
function FlexLayoutVerticalAlignmentControl({
  layout,
  onChange,
  isToolbar = false
}) {
  const {
    orientation = 'horizontal'
  } = layout;
  const defaultVerticalAlignment = orientation === 'horizontal' ? verticalAlignmentMap.center : verticalAlignmentMap.top;
  const {
    verticalAlignment = defaultVerticalAlignment
  } = layout;
  const onVerticalAlignmentChange = value => {
    onChange({
      ...layout,
      verticalAlignment: value
    });
  };
  if (isToolbar) {
    return /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(BlockVerticalAlignmentControl, {
      onChange: onVerticalAlignmentChange,
      value: verticalAlignment,
      controls: orientation === 'horizontal' ? ['top', 'center', 'bottom', 'stretch'] : ['top', 'center', 'bottom', 'space-between']
    });
  }
  const verticalAlignmentOptions = [{
    value: 'flex-start',
    label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Align items top')
  }, {
    value: 'center',
    label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Align items center')
  }, {
    value: 'flex-end',
    label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Align items bottom')
  }];
  return /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsxs)("fieldset", {
    className: "block-editor-hooks__flex-layout-vertical-alignment-control",
    children: [/*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)("legend", {
      children: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Vertical alignment')
    }), /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)("div", {
      children: verticalAlignmentOptions.map((value, icon, label) => {
        return /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_components_namespaceObject.Button, {
          label: label,
          icon: icon,
          isPressed: verticalAlignment === value,
          onClick: () => onVerticalAlignmentChange(value)
        }, value);
      })
    })]
  });
}
const POPOVER_PROPS = {
  placement: 'bottom-start'
};
function FlexLayoutJustifyContentControl({
  layout,
  onChange,
  isToolbar = false
}) {
  const {
    justifyContent = 'left',
    orientation = 'horizontal'
  } = layout;
  const onJustificationChange = value => {
    onChange({
      ...layout,
      justifyContent: value
    });
  };
  const allowedControls = ['left', 'center', 'right'];
  if (orientation === 'horizontal') {
    allowedControls.push('space-between');
  } else {
    allowedControls.push('stretch');
  }
  if (isToolbar) {
    return /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(JustifyContentControl, {
      allowedControls: allowedControls,
      value: justifyContent,
      onChange: onJustificationChange,
      popoverProps: POPOVER_PROPS
    });
  }
  const justificationOptions = [{
    value: 'left',
    icon: justify_left,
    label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Justify items left')
  }, {
    value: 'center',
    icon: justify_center,
    label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Justify items center')
  }, {
    value: 'right',
    icon: justify_right,
    label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Justify items right')
  }];
  if (orientation === 'horizontal') {
    justificationOptions.push({
      value: 'space-between',
      icon: justify_space_between,
      label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Space between items')
    });
  } else {
    justificationOptions.push({
      value: 'stretch',
      icon: justify_stretch,
      label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Stretch items')
    });
  }
  return /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_components_namespaceObject.__experimentalToggleGroupControl, {
    __nextHasNoMarginBottom: true,
    label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Justification'),
    value: justifyContent,
    onChange: onJustificationChange,
    className: "block-editor-hooks__flex-layout-justification-controls",
    children: justificationOptions.map(({
      value,
      icon,
      label
    }) => {
      return /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_components_namespaceObject.__experimentalToggleGroupControlOptionIcon, {
        value: value,
        icon: icon,
        label: label
      }, value);
    })
  });
}
function FlexWrapControl({
  layout,
  onChange
}) {
  const {
    flexWrap = 'wrap'
  } = layout;
  return /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_components_namespaceObject.ToggleControl, {
    __nextHasNoMarginBottom: true,
    label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Allow to wrap to multiple lines'),
    onChange: value => {
      onChange({
        ...layout,
        flexWrap: value ? 'wrap' : 'nowrap'
      });
    },
    checked: flexWrap === 'wrap'
  });
}
function OrientationControl({
  layout,
  onChange
}) {
  const {
    orientation = 'horizontal',
    verticalAlignment,
    justifyContent
  } = layout;
  return /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsxs)(external_wp_components_namespaceObject.__experimentalToggleGroupControl, {
    __nextHasNoMarginBottom: true,
    className: "block-editor-hooks__flex-layout-orientation-controls",
    label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Orientation'),
    value: orientation,
    onChange: value => {
      // Make sure the vertical alignment and justification are compatible with the new orientation.
      let newVerticalAlignment = verticalAlignment;
      let newJustification = justifyContent;
      if (value === 'horizontal') {
        if (verticalAlignment === 'space-between') {
          newVerticalAlignment = 'center';
        }
        if (justifyContent === 'stretch') {
          newJustification = 'left';
        }
      } else {
        if (verticalAlignment === 'stretch') {
          newVerticalAlignment = 'top';
        }
        if (justifyContent === 'space-between') {
          newJustification = 'left';
        }
      }
      return onChange({
        ...layout,
        orientation: value,
        verticalAlignment: newVerticalAlignment,
        justifyContent: newJustification
      });
    },
    children: [/*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_components_namespaceObject.__experimentalToggleGroupControlOptionIcon, {
      icon: arrow_right,
      value: "horizontal",
      label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Horizontal')
    }), /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_components_namespaceObject.__experimentalToggleGroupControlOptionIcon, {
      icon: arrow_down,
      value: "vertical",
      label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Vertical')
    })]
  });
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/layouts/flow.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

/* harmony default export */ const flow = ({
  name: 'default',
  label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Flow'),
  inspectorControls: function DefaultLayoutInspectorControls() {
    return null;
  },
  toolBarControls: function DefaultLayoutToolbarControls() {
    return null;
  },
  getLayoutStyle: function getLayoutStyle({
    selector,
    style,
    blockName,
    hasBlockGapSupport,
    layoutDefinitions = LAYOUT_DEFINITIONS
  }) {
    const blockGapStyleValue = getGapCSSValue(style?.spacing?.blockGap);

// This is for backwards compatibility with hybrid themes.
    if (!isBlockBasedTheme) {
      const {
        contentSize,
        wideSize
      } = layout;
      if (contentSize) {
        alignments.unshift({
          name: 'full'
        });
      }
      if (wideSize) {
        alignments.unshift({
          name: 'wide',
          info: alignmentInfo.wide
        });
      }
    }
    alignments.unshift({
      name: 'none',
      info: alignmentInfo.none
    });
    return alignments;
  }
});

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/icons/build-module/icon/index.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/** @typedef {{icon: JSX.Element, size?: number} & import('@wordpress/primitives').SVGProps} IconProps */

/**
 * Return an SVG icon.
 *
 * @param {IconProps}                                 props icon is the SVG component to render
 *                                                          size is a number specifiying the icon size in pixels
 *                                                          Other props will be passed to wrapped SVG component
 * @param {import('react').ForwardedRef<HTMLElement>} ref   The forwarded ref to the SVG element.
 *
 * @return {JSX.Element}  Icon component
 */
function Icon({
  icon,
  size = 24,
  ...props
}, ref) {
  return (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.cloneElement)(icon, {
    width: size,
    height: size,
    ...props,
    ref
  });
}
/* harmony default export */ const build_module_icon = ((0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.forwardRef)(Icon));

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/icons/build-module/library/position-center.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const positionCenter = /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.SVG, {
  xmlns: "http://www.w3.org/2000/svg",
  viewBox: "0 0 24 24",
  children: /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "M19 5.5H5V4h14v1.5ZM19 20H5v-1.5h14V20ZM7 9h10v6H7V9Z"
  })
});
/* harmony default export */ const position_center = (positionCenter);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/icons/build-module/library/stretch-wide.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

const stretchWide = /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.SVG, {
  xmlns: "http://www.w3.org/2000/svg",
  viewBox: "0 0 24 24",
  children: /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_primitives_namespaceObject.Path, {
    d: "M16 5.5H8V4h8v1.5ZM16 20H8v-1.5h8V20ZM5 9h14v6H5V9Z"
  })
});
/* harmony default export */ const stretch_wide = (stretchWide);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: external ["wp","styleEngine"]
const external_wp_styleEngine_namespaceObject = window["wp"]["styleEngine"];
;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/layouts/constrained.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

/* harmony default export */ const constrained = ({
  name: 'constrained',
  label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Constrained'),
  inspectorControls: function DefaultLayoutInspectorControls({
    layout,
    onChange,
    layoutBlockSupport = {}
  }) {
    const {
      wideSize,
      contentSize,
      justifyContent = 'center'
    } = layout;
    const {
      allowJustification = true,
      allowCustomContentAndWideSize = true
    } = layoutBlockSupport;
    const onJustificationChange = value => {
      onChange({
        ...layout,
        justifyContent: value
      });
    };
    const justificationOptions = [{
      value: 'left',
      icon: justify_left,
      label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Justify items left')
    }, {
      value: 'center',
      icon: justify_center,
      label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Justify items center')
    }, {
      value: 'right',
      icon: justify_right,
      label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Justify items right')
    }];
    const [availableUnits] = use_settings_useSettings('spacing.units');
    const units = (0,external_wp_components_namespaceObject.__experimentalUseCustomUnits)({
      availableUnits: availableUnits || ['%', 'px', 'em', 'rem', 'vw']
    });
    return /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsxs)(external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.Fragment, {
      children: [allowCustomContentAndWideSize && /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsxs)(external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.Fragment, {
        children: [/*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsxs)("div", {
          className: "block-editor-hooks__layout-controls",
          children: [/*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsxs)("div", {
            className: "block-editor-hooks__layout-controls-unit",
            children: [/*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_components_namespaceObject.__experimentalUnitControl, {
              className: "block-editor-hooks__layout-controls-unit-input",
              label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Content'),
              labelPosition: "top",
              __unstableInputWidth: "80px",
              value: contentSize || wideSize || '',
              onChange: nextWidth => {
                nextWidth = 0 > parseFloat(nextWidth) ? '0' : nextWidth;
                onChange({
                  ...layout,
                  contentSize: nextWidth
                });
              },
              units: units
            }), /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(build_module_icon, {
              icon: position_center
            })]
          }), /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsxs)("div", {
            className: "block-editor-hooks__layout-controls-unit",
            children: [/*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_components_namespaceObject.__experimentalUnitControl, {
              className: "block-editor-hooks__layout-controls-unit-input",
              label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Wide'),
              labelPosition: "top",
              __unstableInputWidth: "80px",
              value: wideSize || contentSize || '',
              onChange: nextWidth => {
                nextWidth = 0 > parseFloat(nextWidth) ? '0' : nextWidth;
                onChange({
                  ...layout,
                  wideSize: nextWidth
                });
              },
              units: units
            }), /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(build_module_icon, {
              icon: stretch_wide
            })]
          })]
        }), /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)("p", {
          className: "block-editor-hooks__layout-controls-helptext",
          children: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Customize the width for all elements that are assigned to the center or wide columns.')
        })]
      }), allowJustification && /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_components_namespaceObject.__experimentalToggleGroupControl, {
        __nextHasNoMarginBottom: true,
        label: (0,external_wp_i18n_namespaceObject.__)('Justification'),
        value: justifyContent,
        onChange: onJustificationChange,
        children: justificationOptions.map(({
          value,
          icon,
          label
        }) => {
          return /*#__PURE__*/(0,external_ReactJSXRuntime_namespaceObject.jsx)(external_wp_components_namespaceObject.__experimentalToggleGroupControlOptionIcon, {
            value: value,
            icon: icon,
            label: label
          }, value);
        })
      })]
    });
  },
  toolBarControls: function DefaultLayoutToolbarControls() {
    return null;
  },
  getLayoutStyle: function getLayoutStyle({
    selector,
    layout = {},
    style,
    blockName,
    hasBlockGapSupport,
    layoutDefinitions = LAYOUT_DEFINITIONS
  }) {
    const {
      contentSize,
      wideSize,
      justifyContent
    } = layout;
    const blockGapStyleValue = getGapCSSValue(style?.spacing?.blockGap);

// If a block's block.json skips serialization for spacing or
    // spacing.blockGap, don't apply the user-defined value to the styles.
    let blockGapValue = '';
    if (!shouldSkipSerialization(blockName, 'spacing', 'blockGap')) {
      // If an object is provided only use the 'top' value for this kind of gap.
      if (blockGapStyleValue?.top) {
        blockGapValue = getGapCSSValue(blockGapStyleValue?.top);
      } else if (typeof blockGapStyleValue === 'string') {
        blockGapValue = getGapCSSValue(blockGapStyleValue);
      }
    }
    const marginLeft = justifyContent === 'left' ? '0 !important' : 'auto !important';
    const marginRight = justifyContent === 'right' ? '0 !important' : 'auto !important';
    let output = !!contentSize || !!wideSize ? `
					${appendSelectors(selector, '> :where(:not(.alignleft):not(.alignright):not(.alignfull))')} {
						max-width: ${contentSize !== null && contentSize !== void 0 ? contentSize : wideSize};
						margin-left: ${marginLeft};
						margin-right: ${marginRight};
					}
					${appendSelectors(selector, '> .alignwide')}  {
						max-width: ${wideSize !== null && wideSize !== void 0 ? wideSize : contentSize};
					}
					${appendSelectors(selector, '> .alignfull')} {
						max-width: none;
					}
				` : '';
    if (justifyContent === 'left') {
      output += `${appendSelectors(selector, '> :where(:not(.alignleft):not(.alignright):not(.alignfull))')}
			{ margin-left: ${marginLeft}; }`;
    } else if (justifyContent === 'right') {
      output += `${appendSelectors(selector, '> :where(:not(.alignleft):not(.alignright):not(.alignfull))')}
			{ margin-right: ${marginRight}; }`;
    }

// If there is custom padding, add negative margins for alignfull blocks.
    if (style?.spacing?.padding) {
      // The style object might be storing a preset so we need to make sure we get a usable value.
      const paddingValues = (0,external_wp_styleEngine_namespaceObject.getCSSRules)(style);
      paddingValues.forEach(rule => {
        if (rule.key === 'paddingRight') {
          // Add unit if 0, to avoid calc(0 * -1) which is invalid.
          const paddingRightValue = rule.value === '0' ? '0px' : rule.value;
          output += `
					${appendSelectors(selector, '> .alignfull')} {
						margin-right: calc(${paddingRightValue} * -1);
					}
					`;
        } else if (rule.key === 'paddingLeft') {
          // Add unit if 0, to avoid calc(0 * -1) which is invalid.
          const paddingLeftValue = rule.value === '0' ? '0px' : rule.value;
          output += `
					${appendSelectors(selector, '> .alignfull')} {
						margin-left: calc(${paddingLeftValue} * -1);
					}
					`;
        }
      });
    }

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/provider/block-refs-provider.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/block-list/use-block-props/use-block-refs.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

/** @typedef {import('@wordpress/element').RefCallback} RefCallback */
/** @typedef {import('@wordpress/element').RefObject} RefObject */

/**
 * Provides a ref to the BlockRefs context.
 *
 * @param {string} clientId The client ID of the element ref.
 *
 * @return {RefCallback} Ref callback.
 */
function useBlockRefProvider(clientId) {
  const {
    refsMap
  } = (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useContext)(BlockRefs);
  return (0,external_wp_compose_namespaceObject.useRefEffect)(element => {
    refsMap.set(clientId, element);
    return () => refsMap.delete(clientId);
  }, [clientId]);
}

/**
 * Gets a ref pointing to the current block element. Continues to return the same
 * stable ref object even if the `clientId` argument changes. This hook is not
 * reactive, i.e., it won't trigger a rerender of the calling component if the
 * ref value changes. For reactive use cases there is the `useBlockElement` hook.
 *
 * @param {string} clientId The client ID to get a ref for.
 *
 * @return {RefObject} A ref containing the element.
 */
function useBlockRef(clientId) {
  const {
    refsMap
  } = (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useContext)(BlockRefs);
  const latestClientId = (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useRef)();
  latestClientId.current = clientId;

// Always return an object, even if no ref exists for a given client ID, so
  // that `current` works at a later point.
  return (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useMemo)(() => ({
    get current() {
      var _refsMap$get;
      return (_refsMap$get = refsMap.get(latestClientId.current)) !== null && _refsMap$get !== void 0 ? _refsMap$get : null;
    }
  }), [refsMap]);
}

/**
 * Return the element for a given client ID. Updates whenever the element
 * changes, becomes available, or disappears.
 *
 * @param {string} clientId The client ID to an element for.
 *
 * @return {Element|null} The block's wrapper element.
 */
function useBlockElement(clientId) {
  const {
    refsMap
  } = (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useContext)(BlockRefs);
  const [blockElement, setBlockElement] = (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useState)(null);
  // Delay setting the resulting `blockElement` until an effect. If the block element
  // changes (i.e., the block is unmounted and re-mounted), this allows enough time
  // for the ref callbacks to clean up the old element and set the new one.
  (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useLayoutEffect)(() => {
    setBlockElement(refsMap.get(clientId));
    return refsMap.subscribe(clientId, () => setBlockElement(refsMap.get(clientId)));
  }, [refsMap, clientId]);
  return blockElement;
}

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/block-popover/use-popover-scroll.js
/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Allow scrolling "through" popovers over the canvas. This is only called for
 * as long as the pointer is over a popover. Do not use React events because it
 * will bubble through portals.
 *
 * @param {Object} scrollableRef
 */
function usePopoverScroll(scrollableRef) {
  return (0,external_wp_compose_namespaceObject.useRefEffect)(node => {
    if (!scrollableRef) {
      return;
    }
    function onWheel(event) {
      const {
        deltaX,
        deltaY
      } = event;
      scrollableRef.current.scrollBy(deltaX, deltaY);
    }
    // Tell the browser that we do not call event.preventDefault
    // See https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/EventTarget/addEventListener#improving_scrolling_performance_with_passive_listeners
    const options = {
      passive: true
    };
    node.addEventListener('wheel', onWheel, options);
    return () => {
      node.removeEventListener('wheel', onWheel, options);
    };
  }, [scrollableRef]);
}
/* harmony default export */ const use_popover_scroll = (usePopoverScroll);

;// CONCATENATED MODULE: ./node_modules/@wordpress/block-editor/build-module/components/block-popover/index.js
/**
 * External dependencies
 */

/**
 * WordPress dependencies
 */

/**
 * Internal dependencies
 */

const MAX_POPOVER_RECOMPUTE_COUNTER = Number.MAX_SAFE_INTEGER;
function BlockPopover({
  clientId,
  bottomClientId,
  children,
  __unstablePopoverSlot,
  __unstableContentRef,
  shift = true,
  ...props
}, ref) {
  const selectedElement = useBlockElement(clientId);
  const lastSelectedElement = useBlockElement(bottomClientId !== null && bottomClientId !== void 0 ? bottomClientId : clientId);
  const mergedRefs = (0,external_wp_compose_namespaceObject.useMergeRefs)([ref, use_popover_scroll(__unstableContentRef)]);
  const [popoverDimensionsRecomputeCounter, forceRecomputePopoverDimensions] = (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useReducer)(
  // Module is there to make sure that the counter doesn't overflow.
  s => (s + 1) % MAX_POPOVER_RECOMPUTE_COUNTER, 0);

// When blocks are moved up/down, they are animated to their new position by
  // updating the `transform` property manually (i.e. without using CSS
  // transitions or animations). The animation, which can also scroll the block
  // editor, can sometimes cause the position of the Popover to get out of sync.
  // A MutationObserver is therefore used to make sure that changes to the
  // selectedElement's attribute (i.e. `transform`) can be tracked and used to
  // trigger the Popover to rerender.
  (0,external_wp_element_namespaceObject.useLayoutEffect)(() => {
    if (!selectedElement) {
      return;
    }
    const observer = new window.MutationObserver(forceRecomputePopoverDimensions);
    observer.observe(selectedElement, {
      attributes: true
    });
    return () => {
      observer.disconnect();
    };
  }, [selectedElement]);

• Search:

• Replace:

123 4 5 6 ...8